Operating Instructions
Blu-ray Disc Recorder
Model No. DMR-BW850
DMR-BW750
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show the image of DMR-BW850.
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product.
For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
Declaration of Conformity (12th December 2008)
For DMR-BW850
For DMR-BW750
No. 6257
No. 6258
This Blu-ray Disc Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not pay TV or encrypted channels.
Region management information
BD-Video
Example:
This unit plays BD-Video marked with labels containing the region code B.
DVD-Video
Example:
The unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels containing the region number “4” or “ALL”.
2
3
4
ALL
4
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
GL
RQT9428-1L
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of April 2009. These may be subject to change.)
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
(N2QAYB000345)
1
Remote control
2
Batteries
for remote control
1
AC mains lead
1
RF coaxial cable
1
Audio/video cable
For use with this unit only.
Do not use it with other
equipment.
Also, do not use cords for
other equipment with this
unit.
The remote control information
Batteries
Use
ꢁInsert so the poles (+ and –) match those in the remote control.
Remote control signal sensor
20
20
R6/LR6, AA
30
ꢁUse alkaline or manganese batteries.
ꢁDo not mix old and new batteries.
ꢁDo not use different types at the same time.
ꢁDo not heat or expose to flame.
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
ꢁDo not leave batteries in an automobile exposed to direct sunlight
for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
ꢁDo not take apart or short circuit.
ꢁDo not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
ꢁDo not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
RQT9428
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Getting started
Title
Getting started
Characteristics of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Recording
Important notes for recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Operation during Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . .35
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
TV Guide data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Quick Start Guide
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Regarding Blu-ray Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Regarding DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play. . . . . . . . . . . .8
Play-only discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Discs that cannot be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Cards you can use on this unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Easy access to various functions
Playing back
—FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . .15
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting, removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting, removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Disc and card care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Display the subtitle during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
—Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Switching of the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
. . . . . . . . . . . 40
HDD
Playback the title that was viewed once
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
HDD
To play grouped titles
To edit the group of titles
HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD) . . . . . .41
Playback of the playlist created on
other equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Playing DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
To enjoy the BD Video which supports
Basic operations
BONUSVIEW or BD-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Playing secondary video (picture-in-picture) and secondary
audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enjoying BD-Live discs with Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
To enjoy High Bit rate Audio and Video . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Enjoying High Bit rate Audio with 7.1ch speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Regarding 24p output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Watching digital broadcasts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Select the channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Switching audio of the TV broadcast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
To show subtitle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
To show Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video/Playing recorded
video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
HDD
Editing
Editing titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Create Chapter Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Editing and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Recording television programmes
. . . . . . . . . . . 23
When recording digital broadcast with subtitle or
multiple audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
To specify a time to stop recording
—One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Timer recording (Using the TV Guide System) . . . . 24
Programme to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programme to a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Copying
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Copying using the copying list—Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Deleting titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Deleting during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Copying titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
With Other Equipment
Recording broadcasts from external equipment. . . . . .57
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Recording via AV2 input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video
(MPEG2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
RQT9428
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures
Others
Still pictures
Convenient functions
Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Useful functions during still picture play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Still pictures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Copying still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Convenient functions to playback and viewing. . . . . . .80
Using on-screen menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
FUNCTION MENU window/Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . .83
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Copying new still pictures on the SD card
—Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Deleting still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Disc and card management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Setting the protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Enabling the unit’s recording function—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . .86
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
HDD/Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Network Setings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Music
Music
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playing music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Editing music/playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Album and track operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Register track to Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Editing Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Playlist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Copying music from a disc or a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Deleting music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Reference
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . .99
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . .99
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television
and receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Connecting a Digital television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Operations that can be performed simultaneously . . 103
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a
title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Starting of the timer recording while executing
other operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Safety precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
About descriptions in these operating instructions
ꢁThese operating instructions are applicable to models DMR-
BW850 and DMR-BW750. Unless otherwise indicated,
illustrations in these operating instructions are DMR-BW850.
DMR-BW850
DMR-BW750
: indicates features applicable to DMR-BW850 only.
: indicates features applicable to DMR-BW750 only.
ꢁPages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ ꢂꢂ”.
RQT9428
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
This unit can record or copy to the following HDD or discs.
Internal
DDVVDD--RRAAMM DDVVDD--RR
DDVVDD--RR DDLL DDVVDD--RRWW
++RRWW
BBDD--RREE
HHDDDD
BBDD--RR
++RR
++RR DDLL
Discs that can record to will differ depending on the recording method.
To record
It can only record to HDD by pressing [ REC].
*
Discs
HDD
REC
Record to the HDD and
then copy to the disc.
Can do
Cannot do
To timer record
It can only record to HDD, BD-RE. BD-R or DVD-RAM when using timer recording.
BD-RE
BD-R
DVD-RAM
Other Discs
SAT 10.01.2009 19:10
HDD
TV Guide
SAT 10.01 Landscape
All Types
All DVB Channels
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
Record to the HDD
and then copy to the
disc.
ABC 2
News
News
News
Select Channel
OK
Info
OPTION
Page UP
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
Page Down
Can do
Can do
Cannot do
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
Regarding Blu-ray Disc
1. High volume recording
The Blu-ray Disc (BD-RE and BD-R) has a lot more recording capacity compared with the DVD.
When you compare the Blu-ray Disc (single-side dual-layer 50 GB) with the DVD-R (4.7 GB)
Blu-ray Disc
(50 GB:single-side dual-layer )
DVD-R (4.7 GB)
About 10 DVD-Rs
When a 2 hour movie is recorded (in SP mode)
About 1 movie
About 10 movies
2. High quality recording
Blu-ray Disc can record the image of the digital broadcasting in the same quality as broadcasted. Therefore, high definition quality image can
be recorded as it is.
Blu-ray Disc
Broadcasted images can be recorded as they are
(When recorded in DR mode)
DVD-R, etc.
Broadcasted images cannot be recorded as they are
(Cannot record in DR mode)
RQT9428
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various recording modes can be selected when recording or copying is performed on this unit. Time and quality of recording varies depending on
the recording mode. ( 30, Recording modes)
The following are characteristics of DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode.
Regarding DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode
The following can be recorded or copied in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode
HHDDDD
BBDD--RREE
BBDD--RR
Programmes in high definition (HD) quality
Goal!
When recording a high definition
programme with subtitle or multiple
audio
Recording
Goal!
DR mode
HG, HX, HE, HL mode
All subtitles and multiple audio are recorded.
Record as high definition (HD) quality
(the same quality of the broadcast)
Subtitles cannot be recorded. Only one audio
can be recorded for the multiple audio.
Record as high definition (HD) quality.
(the compressed high definition data)
HDHDD
When copying DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode
titles to disc
Quality and speed of copying depends on the
disc to copy.
COPY
BD-RE
BD-R
BD-RE
BD-R
Other discs
Goal!
DR mode
HG, HX, HE, HL mode
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode
Subtitles cannot be recorded. Only one audio
can be recorded for the multiple audio.
Copy as high definition (HD) quality
(the compressed high definition data)
Copy in High Speed mode when copying
the title recorded in HG, HX, HE or HL
mode on HDD.
Subtitles cannot be recorded. Only one audio
can be recorded for the multiple audio.
Copy as standard definition (SD) quality
Copy in Normal Speed mode
All subtitles and multiple audio are
recorded.
Copy as high definition (HD) quality
(the same quality of the broadcast)
Copy in High Speed mode
The title in HG, HX, HE, HL mode on
the HDD cannot convert to DR mode.
Copy in Normal Speed mode when copying
the title recorded in DR mode on HDD
RQT9428
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(ꢂ: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Hard disk drive (HDD)
HDD
Standard symbol
Data that can be recorded and played
Quality in which video is recorded
Recording mode in which video is recordedꢃ
Rewritable
Video/Still picture/Music
High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality
DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Timer recording
Copy once recording
Disc type
BD-RE
BD-R
(50 GB/25 GB)
(50 GB/25 GB)
BD-RE
BD-R
Standard symbol
Data that can be recorded and played
Quality in which video is recorded
Recording mode in which video is recordedꢃ
Rewritable
Video/Still picture
Video
High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality
DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
ꢂ
–
ꢂ
ꢂ
Timer recording
Copy once recording
Play on other players
It can be played on the players compatible to BD-RE (Ver. 2.1) and BD-R.
ꢁBD-RE and BD-R that were recorded on this unit may not be played on other Blu-ray
players, etc.
ꢁPlayback of LTH type BD-R discs may not be possible with players that do not support the
LTH type format.
ꢁSingle-side dual-layer (50GB) disc can only be played on the compatible player.
Note
ꢁDL is also included.
“DL” is a single-side dual-layer disc.
ꢁDL is also included.
“DL” is a single-side dual-layer disc.
ꢁBD-RE (Ver. 1.0) with a cartridge cannot ꢁLTH type is also included.
be used with this unit. (It cannot be used ꢁFor BD-R finalised with this unit or other
even if it is taken out from the cartridge)
Use the BD-RE compliant to Blu-ray Disc
Rewritable Format Version 2.1.
equipment, only playback is possible.
(➡ 86)
ꢃ
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
RQT9428
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc type
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DVD-RW
RAM
-R
DVD-V
-R DL
-RW(V)
Standard symbol
before finalisation
before
before
finalisation
after finalisation finalisation
DVD-V
DVD-V
after finalisation
after finalisation
Data that can be recorded and
played
Video
Still picture
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is
recordedꢃ
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Rewritable
–
–
–
Timer recording
Copy-once recording
ꢂ
CPRM compatible
discs only.
RAM
Play on other players
can be played
ꢁFinalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
ꢁ
-R DL
can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.
back on Panasonic
DVD recorders and
DVD-RAM compatible
DVD players.
Note
Take the disc out from
the cartridge to use the
DVD-RAM with a
–
cartridge. (TYPE1
cannot be used)
Disc type
+R
+R DL
+RW
+RW
+R
DVD-V
+R DL
DVD-V
Standard symbol
before finalisation
before finalisation
after finalisation
after finalisation
Data that can be recorded and
played
Video
Quality in which video is recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode in which video is
recordedꢃ
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
ꢂ
Rewritable
–
Timer recording
Copy-once recording
Play on other players
–
–
+RW
ꢁFinalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
can be played back only on equipment compatible with
this disc.
can be played back only
+R DL
ꢁ
on equipment compatible with
this disc.
ꢁIf the disc failed to play on
other equipment, we
recommend you create top
menu (➡ 86).
Note
ꢁ+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may
be incompatible. However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
ꢁ8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.
ꢃ
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.
Note
ꢁDiscs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be able to be recorded to.
ꢁThis unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)
ꢁYou may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
■ Regarding 8 cm Disc
This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R DL or +RW.
Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible.
RQT9428
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
Play-only discs
Standard
symbol
Disc type
Logo
Uses
High Definition (HD) movie and music discs
ꢁThis unit can playback BONUSVIEW™ or BD-Live compatible discs.
(➡ 44)
BD-V
BD-Video
ꢁWhen playing a set of two or more BD-Video discs, the menu screen
may continue to display even if the disc has been ejected.
ꢁTo enjoy High Bit rate Audio and Video (➡ 45)
ꢁOperation of this unit may become slower when the BD-J application
(➡ 118) is executing. This is not malfunction.
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-V
DVD-Video
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
ꢁYou can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
ꢁBy formatting (➡ 85) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
ꢁIt may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
-RW(VR)
ꢁDVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX
ꢁDVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3
ꢁDVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX, MP3,
JPEG
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RWꢃ)
CD
CD
ꢁCD-Rꢃand CD-RWꢃwith video recorded in DivX
ꢁCD-Rꢃand CD-RWꢃwith music recorded in MP3
ꢁCD-Rꢃand CD-RWꢃwith still pictures recorded in JPEG
DivX, MP3,
JPEG
–
–
Disc with high
definition
video
Following disc can be played.
ꢁBD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW
ꢁFinalise (➡ 118) the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW(V), +R or +R DL
with the same equipment that was used to record.
ꢁSet “Play Video (AVCHD) on BD-RE/BD-R” to “On” for the disc that
has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded by the camcorder and
other video format such as those recorded on this unit. (➡ 89)
(AVCHD)
AVCHD
recorded by
high definition
video camera,
etc.
ꢃ
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
ꢁThe producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
ꢁOperation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
ꢁBD-RE (Ver.1.0)
ꢁDVD-RAM that cannot be removed from their cartridges
ꢁ2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
ꢁ3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
ꢁDVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised (➡ 118).
ꢁBD-Video with a region code other than “B”
ꢁDVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”
ꢁDVD-Audio
ꢁHD DVD
ꢁDVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, Video CD, etc.
RQT9428
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB memory and card information
USB memories you can use on this unit
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class and digital camera that use PTP
protocol:
–USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
ꢁUSB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
ꢁUSB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
Compatible USB memories
ꢁDigital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not
supported.
ꢁMTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
ꢁA multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
ꢁUDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
ꢁDepending on the sector size, some files may not work.
ꢁOnly the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Format
Indicated in these instructions
by
USB
Data that can be played
DivX, MP3, Still pictures (JPEG)
MP3
ꢁIt can be copied to HDD.
Still pictures (JPEG)
ꢁIt can be copied to HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM.
Data that can be copied
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
ꢁIf a Panasonic Video Camera with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port:
– you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
– you can copy the HD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
ꢁDespite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
Note
ꢁThis unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards you can use on this unit
SD Memory Cardꢃ(from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
Type
ꢃ
Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
Indicated in these instructions
by
SD
Still pictures (JPEG)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
Data that can be played
Still pictures (JPEG)
ꢁIt can be copied to HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM.
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
Data that can be copied
ꢁSD Video shot with a Panasonic Video Camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 61)
ꢁHD Video shot with a Panasonic Video Camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
(➡ 60)
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
Instructions
ꢃ
A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
Suitable SD cards
ꢁWhen using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.
ꢁUseable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
ꢁPlease confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This site is in English only.)
ꢁIf the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 85, 118).
ꢁThis unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards
in FAT32 format.
ꢁSDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory
Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
ꢁWe recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
ꢁKeep the SD Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
■ Setting the protection
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
RQT9428
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (➡ 18)
bo
2 Select drive (HDD, BD or SD) (➡ 22, 23, 62)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers or
characters (The character buttons may be used when operating
VIERA CAST contents.)
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (➡ 26, 36, 68, 75)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show digital channel information (➡ 21)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (➡ 37)/Show status messages (➡ 82)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 38)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 22, 62, 70)/Pop-up Menu (➡ 22)/
Top menu (➡ 22)
9 Show OPTION menu (➡ 46, 64, 72)
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
bk Colour buttons
Use in accordance with instruction on the screen.
bl Recording functions
TV
1
bp
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2
3
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
bq
br
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
p
w
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
bs
bt
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
4
5
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
ꢁ[ REC] Start recording (➡ 23)
*
ꢁ[REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 23)
bm Show teletext (➡ 21)
bn Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (➡ 20)
bo Transmit the remote control signal
bp Television operations (➡ 95)
bq Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(➡ 20, 37)
br Show VIERA CAST (➡ 77)
STOP
PAUSE PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS
ck
cl
6
7
I
F
R
G
bs Input select (TV, AV1, AV2 or DV) (➡ 20, 23, 57, 58)
bt Skip approx. 1 minute forward (➡ 39)
ck Exit the menu screen
cl Show the TV Guide screen (➡ 24, 37)
cm Show FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 13)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
cn Return to previous screen
8
9
cm
OK
cn
co
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
bk
bl
co Create chapter (➡ 49)
cp Show Timer Recording screen (➡ 34)
cq Skip the specified time (➡ 39)
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
cp
cq
cr Show on-screen menu (➡ 80)
TEXT
STTL
AUDIO DISPLAY
cs Select audio (➡ 20, 39)
bm
bn
cr
cs
The unit’s display
1 2 3 4
EXT-L COPY
SD USB
HDDSDVD
D
USBDD
PLAY
8
5 6
7
9
1 SD card slot indicator
2ꢀUSB port indicator
3ꢀCopying indicator
4 Disc indicator
5 Drive (HDD, BD or SD) indicator
Select “BD” for DVD. BD indicator will light up.
6 Remote control signal indicator
7 Main display section indicator
8 Playback indicator
9ꢀTimer recording indicator
RQT9428
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9 bk bl bmbnbo
bp
Pull to flip down the
front panel.
1 Standby/on switch ( ) (➡ 18)
8 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 58)
9 SD card slot (➡ 15)
bk USB port (➡ 15)
8
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
bl Channel select (➡ 20)
2 Disc tray (➡ 15)
3 SD Card LED
bm Start recording/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 23)
bn Stop (➡ 23, 38)
ꢁIt is possible to set the LED to turn on/off. (➡ 92)
4 Display (➡ 12)
bo Start play
bp Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (➡ 57)
5 Recording indicator
6 Remote control signal sensor
7 Open/close disc tray (➡ 15)
Rear panel terminals (➡ 16, 17, 99–102)
Easy access to various functions—FUNCTION MENU Display
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
1 Playback
Select the title or file type you
wish to play. The DIRECT
NAVIGATOR screen or menu
screen etc. for the selected type
will be displayed.
Video (➡ 22, 40)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
DivX (➡ 42)
Picture (➡ 62)
Music (➡ 69)
Top Menu (➡ 22)
Menu (➡ 22)
You can start programming
timer recording or reconfirm and
change the timer recording
settings.
2 Recording (➡34)
3 Delete
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Time Remaining 30:00 DR
Video (➡ 26)
Picture (➡ 68)
Music (➡ 75)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Playback
Recording
Delete
Select the copy method.
4 Copy (➡ 50)
5 TV Guide (➡24)
You can easily find programmes
you want to watch and set them
for timer recording.
Select and execute a function
other than those above, such as
recording or setting.
Copy
6 Others
TV Guide
Playlists (➡ 41)
Flexible Recording (➡ 32)
DV Automatic Recording
(➡ 59)
Others
OK
RETURN
DVD Management (➡ 84)
Blu-ray Disc Management
(➡ 84)
Card Management (➡ 84)
Network (➡ 96)
USB device (➡ 42, 60, 61,
62, 66, 69, 74)
Setup (➡ 87)
Recording via AV2 input
(➡ 59)
Copy Video (AVCHD)
(➡ 60)
Copy New Pictures (➡ 66)
RQT9428
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special
device that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
■ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
■ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
■ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
ꢁWhen the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
■ Setup precautions
■ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
ꢁDo not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
ꢁPlace the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
■ While operating
ꢁDo not place on anything that generates heat like a video
cassette recorder, etc.
ꢁDo not place in an area often subject to
ꢁDo not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
DO NOT
ꢁDo not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
temperature changes.
ꢁPlace in an area where condensation does
not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon
where moisture forms on a cold surface
when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause
internal damage to the unit.
This unit
VCR
■ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx. 2
minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for
a short time.)
ꢁConditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly
impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is
subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of
the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
■ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
DO NOT
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
ꢁNever use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
ꢁBefore using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
The heat can damage the unit.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Note
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is
empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
ꢁThis lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
RQT9428
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)
Inserting discs
Disc and card care
1 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
;
■ How to hold a disc or card
Insert label-up.
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
DO
DO NOT
2 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
;
■ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
Automatic drive select function
BD-V DVD-V CD
, MP3, JPEG, DivX
DO
DO NOT
ꢁIf the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the BD drive when a disc is inserted.
ꢁIf you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
■ Handling precautions
ꢁDo not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
ꢁWrite on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
ꢁDo not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
ꢁDo not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
ꢁDo not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
Disc With a Cartridge
ꢁBD-RE with a cartridge cannot be used with this unit. (It cannot
be used even if it is taken out from the cartridge)
ꢁRemove the DVD-RAM or 8cm disc from the cartridge and
place it on the tray. (TYPE1 cannot be used) Refer to the
instructions on how to remove the disc from the cartridge.
Note
RAM
ꢁ
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
ꢁDo not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
ꢁDo not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
of a double sided disc to the other.You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
DO NOT
shapes.
When the USB memory is flashing, the USB memory is being read
from. Do not turn off the unit or remove the USB memory. Such
action may result in malfunction or loss of the USB memory’s
contents.
ꢁBefore inserting any USB memory to this
unit, ensure that the data stored therein
has been backed up.
ꢁCheck the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
ꢁInsert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press [OK]
to switch to the USB-related operations
(➡ 42, 60, 61, 62, 66, 69, 74).
ꢁDo not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant
difference in temperature (condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
ꢁTo protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Removing the USB memory
ꢁComplete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
ꢁIf a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
Inserting, removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of
the card’s contents.
ꢁInserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
Inserting the card
Press on the centre of the
If you are using a
e.g.,
card until it clicks into
miniSD card or a
miniSD
place.
microSD card, insert
it into the adaptor
that comes with the
ADAPTER
card.
Insert and remove
this adaptor from the
unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
1 Press on the centre of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
Automatic drive select function
ꢁIf you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card”
screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the
SD drive (➡ 60, 61, 62, 66).
RQT9428
ꢁIf you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
ꢁBefore connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
ꢁRefer to “Additional connections” (➡ 99) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.
[approx. 0.7 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]
Connecting a television
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Aerial cable
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
AC mains lead
Other connections
17, 99)
(included)
(
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
3
4
2
1
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Cooling fan
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
RQT9428
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted.You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
ꢁThis unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit rate Audio) technology (➡ 118, 119).
ꢁVideo sources converted to 1920 × 1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
ꢁPlease use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
ꢁWhen outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [➡ 78, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
ꢁNon-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
ꢁIt is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
Required setting
ꢁSet “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio Output”
to “On” (➡ 92).
(The default setting is “On”.)
HDMI cable
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
HDMI AV OUT
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Note
ꢁIf you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 118)
and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
ꢁYou cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9428
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
TV
appropriate AV input to suit the
2
VOL
DRIVE
CH
connections to this unit.
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
2 Press [ ] to turn the unit on.
^
abc
def
2
3
1
When the Download from TV screen appears (➡ 19)
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
p
w
3 Press [ , ] to select your region and
e r
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
press [OK].
DEL
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Region Selection
NSW / ACT
Victoria
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
Queensland
South Australia
Western Australia
Northern Territory
STATUS
EXIT
I
Tasmania
OK
OK
After Region Selection setting is complete, Auto Tuning
setting screen appears.
OPTION
RETURN
3, 4, 5
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
ꢁAuto-Tuning starts.
REC
REC MODE
STTL
TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels. TV
channels will be located and stored ready for use.
This takes 3 minutes.
TEXT
AUDIO
DISPLAY
Auto Tuning-Digital (DVB)
Scan
6
69
This will take about 3 minutes.
CH
35
35
Channel Name
ABC 2
ABC TV
Type
DVB
DVB
Quality
10
10
DVB:6
Searching
RETURN
Auto-Tuning is complete when Power Save setting screen
appears.
The time information can be obtained.
RQT9428
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Download from the TV
4 Press [ , ] to select “On” or “Off”
e r
If this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) supporting
HDAVI Control 3 or later via an HDMI cable, then the setting
information on the TV is acquired by this unit when the unit is
turned on for the first time. Please proceed to the following steps.
and press [OK].
Power Save
On
Off
Download fromTV
On: Minimises standby power consumption,
disables Quick Start function. Unit’s Display
is set to “Automatic”.
Off: Enables Quick Start function.
Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN : to cancel
OK
RETURN
RETURN
ꢁOn:
It will go into the Power Save mode when the power is
After Download from TV is complete, Power Save setting
screen appears.
turned off.
ꢁOff:
Press [
,
e r
] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.
Power Save
The features of the power save function when the unit is in
standby mode are as follows.
On
Off
Onꢃ1
Approx. 0.7 W
Not Quick
Offꢃ2
Approx. 10 W
Quickꢃ3
On: Minimises standby power consumption,
disables Quick Start function. Unit’s Display
is set to “Automatic”.
Power Save
Power consumption
Start up time
Off: Enables Quick Start function.
OK
RETURN
ꢃ1 “Unit’s Display” is fixed to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(➡ 91)
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
ꢃ2 “Unit’s Display” is changed to “Bright” in the Setup menu.
ꢃ3 It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
Note
After Power Save setting is complete, TV aspect setting
screen appears.
ꢁAcquisition of the setting information is not supported by all
Panasonic TVs (VIERA).
ꢁThe acquisition may take some time depending on the VIERA
setting information.
ꢁIf Region Selection screen is displayed, please go to step 3 on
page 18.
5 Press [ , ] to select the TV aspect
e r
and press [OK].
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
4:3 TV
Pan & Scan
Letterbox
OK
RETURN
ꢁ16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
ꢁPan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(➡ 119).
ꢁLetterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(➡ 119).
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
■ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (➡ 88)
■ To restart set up (➡ 88)
RQT9428
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Watching digital broadcasts
■ Select the programme to view using the TV
Guide
TV
1 Press [GUIDE].
^
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SAT 10.01.2009 19:10
SELECT
AV
TV Guide
1 2 CH
All Types
All DVB Channels
SAT 10.01 Landscape
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
PAGE
CH
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
abc
def
2
3
1
News
News
Numbered
buttons
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
p
w
News
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
Select Channel
OK
Info
OPTION
Page Up
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
DEL
Page Down
0
SELECT
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Operations in the TV Guide system (➡ 37)
INPUT SELECT
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
2 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select the programme to
e r w q
view and press [OK].
STATUS
EXIT
EXIT
GUIDE
STATUS
I
News
View
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
OK
e, r, w, q
OPTION
OK
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
ꢁThis is displayed only when the programme currently
broadcasting is selected.
Colour
buttons
REC
REC MODE
STTL
TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
STTL
AUDIO
3 Press [ , ] to select “View” and press [OK].
e r
TEXT
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TEXT
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
This unit has the tuner which allows it to directly receive and record
digital terrestrial channels.
Switching audio of the TV broadcast
Important
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
Press [AUDIO].
ꢁAudio will switch according to the contents of the programme
every time it is pressed.
Select the channel
e.g.,
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
HDD
41:03 DR
002 ABC TV
HDD
41:03 DR
002 ABC TV
HDD
41:03 DR
002 ABC TV
STEREO LR
Dolby Digital
(eng)
STEREO L
Dolby Digital
(eng)
STEREO R
Dolby Digital
(eng)
2 Press [ ] to turn the unit on.
^
3 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV”.
Input Selection
HDD
HDD
HDD
41:03 DR
002 ABC TV
41:03 DR
002 ABC TV
41:03 DR
002 ABC TV
AV1
AV2
DV
STEREO R
eng (MPEG)
STEREO L
eng (MPEG)
STEREO LR
eng (MPEG)
TV
Select
Note
Change
You can not change the audio type in following cases.
ꢁWhen “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.(➡ 90)
ꢁWhen the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (➡ 91)
RETURN
ꢁIt will switch when the display disappears.
(It will switch faster by pressing [OK])
4 Press [
CH] to select the channel.
1 2
To show subtitle
When “ ” appears in digital channel information (➡ 21)
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically.
The length of time the digital channel information is displayed
can be changed. (➡ 91, On-Screen Messages)
Press [STTL ].
ꢁPress again to hide the subtitle.
ꢁYou can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Note
ꢁThis unit can receive free cable television but it cannot receive
paid services.
RQT9428
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show Teletext
You can enjoy teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
Digital channel information
While stopped
Press [STATUS ].
1
2
3
When “ ” appears in digital channel information (➡ right)
1 Press [TEXT ].
All DVB Channels
Select Favourites
Software update
10:30
1 TEN HD
Corontation street
9:00 - 11:00
4
5
Now
Sub page number
Rating:PG
<<01 02 03 04 05 06 07
>>
6
1 Channel and Station Name
2 Programme name and Broadcast time
3 Current favourite list
7
8
9
Current
page
number
P100
TELETEXT
INFORMATION
4 Change the favourite list
5 Software update (➡ 98)
6 The parental ratings level is displayed
7 Subtitle (➡ 20)
8 Teletext (➡ left)
9 Multiple audio
Colour bar
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
2 Press [ , ], the numbered buttons, or
e r
the colour buttons to select the page.
Press [
,
w q
].
Follow the instruction on the screen to select the page.
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ] again.
To show the sub page
(only when there are sub pages)
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Press [
, ].
w q
■ Change the Teletext mode
Note
“Teletext” in the Setup menu can be changed to following modes.
(➡ 91)
You can also select the other channel when the information screen
is displayed by pressing [ ] and [OK].
,
ꢁTOP mode (only when here is TOP text)
TOP is a particular improvement of the standard teletext
service that results in an easier search and effective guide.
–Fast overview of the teletext information available
–Easy to use step-by-step selection of the topical subject
–Page status information at the bottom of the screen
ꢁList mode
e r
■ If New channel message appears
(➡ 88, New Channel Message)
Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the
bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered
and stored in this unit.
To store frequently viewed page (List mode only)
During the page is displayed
1 Press the colour button of the colour to store.
2 Press and hold [OK].
P100
Broadcast
101
200
400
888
The number changes to white.
To change stored pages (List mode only)
1 Press the colour button of the colour to change.
2 Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons.
3 Press and hold [OK].
To exit the teletext screen
Press [TEXT
]
Note
The teletext function depends on respective stations.
RQT9428
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video/Playing recorded video contents
Refer to “Advanced playback” (➡ 38) for detailed
information.
Playing recorded video contents
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them.You
can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles (➡ 40).
TV
VOL
DRIVE
CH
The following screen is displayed when recordable disc is inserted.
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
e.g.,
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
DVD-RAM
Play
Numbered
buttons
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
Copy
p
w
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
DVD-RAM is inserted.
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
OK
u, i
RETURN
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
Press [
,
] to select “Play” and press [OK].
e r
STATUS
EXIT
It will go to step 3 (➡ below).
I
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or BD drive.
OK
e, r, w, q
OK
OPTION
“Red”
The HDD or BD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
OPTION
REC
RETURN
ꢁSelect “BD” for DVD. BD indicator will light up.
CREATE
CHAPTER
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
REC MODE
TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
HDD BD-RE RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
Preparation
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
G
rouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
Date Channel Time
Title Name
25.05
01.01 AV2
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
ꢁTurn on this unit.
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
1 Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
;
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
3 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
ꢁPress the button again to close the tray.
ꢁPlay starts from the point specified by the disc.
press [OK].
2
When a menu screen appears on the television
To show other pages
Press [
,
u i
].
Press [ , , , ] to select the item
e r w q
Regarding DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 40)
and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ꢄ
ꢀ
ꢃ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢁSome items can also be selected using the numbered
buttons.
ꢁIf you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the
menu screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
To display Pop-up Menu
BD-V
While playing
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ꢁPress [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the Pop-up Menu.
To return to the menu screen
BD-V
While playing
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [ ] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].
,
e r
While stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DVD-V
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [ ] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].
,
e r
ꢁYou can also press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to return to the menu
screen.
Note
BD-V
ꢁ
You cannot playback while recording in recording mode
other than DR mode. Also, it will stop the playback when the timer
recording except DR mode recording starts during the playback.
RQT9428
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD
Recording television programmes
Refer to “Important notes for recording” (➡ 28)
and “Advanced recording” (➡ 30) for detailed
information.
5 Press [ REC] to start recording.
*
“REC1” or “REC2” will light
REC1
TV
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
ꢁRecording mode cannot be changed while recording a
programme.
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
CH
1 2
Numbered
buttons
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
p
ꢁWhen [ REC] is pressed while a drive other than the HDD
*
w
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
is selected, it will automatically switch to HDD and start the
recording.
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
INPUT SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
6
To stop recording
h
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
Press [ ].
g
g
STATUS
EXIT
I
■ To pause recording
Press [ ].
h
OK
OK
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
*
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
REC MODE
STTL
TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
When recording digital broadcast with
subtitle or multiple audio
If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, there are
following differences depending on the recording modes.
* REC
REC MODE
TEXT
AUDIO
DISPLAY
This operation will only record to HDD.
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode
All subtitles and multiple audio are recorded. It is possible to
switch them after recording.
To record to a disc (➡ 25)
Preparation
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
ꢁTurn on this unit.
ꢁWhen recording in HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, or EP modes
Subtitles cannot be recorded. Multiple audio will be recorded with
the contents selected when the recording starts, and the switching
cannot be done after the recording.
Select the audio to be recorded with “Audio Mode for Digital
Broadcast” in the Setup menu prior to the recording. (➡ 91)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD drive.
The HDD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
2 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV”.
During recording
Press [ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
*
3 Press [
CH] to select the channel.
1 2
time.
To select with the numbered buttons:
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
ꢁYou can specify up to 4 hours later.
ꢁThe unit display changes as shown below.
OFF0:30
OFF1:00
OFF1:30
OFF4:00
OFF2:00
OFF3:00
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Counter (cancel)
ꢁThis does not work during timer recordings (➡ 24, 34) or while
using Flexible Recording (➡ 32).
ꢁThe unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
ꢁIt will switch every time it is pressed.
e.g.,
Recording Mode
To cancel
Recording Mode Remain
It can be recorded
with the same quality
of the broadcast. (➡ 7)
Press [ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
*
DR
HG
HX
HE
HL
XP
SP
LP
EP
71:52
83:18
appears.
ꢁThe time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
124:57
187:53
251:41
112:37
225:15
450:36
898:34
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
OK
RETURN
ꢁIt will switch when the display is turned off.
(It will switch faster by pressing [OK])
ꢁRecording modes (➡ 30)
ꢁTo record 2 programmes simultaneously (➡ 31)
RQT9428
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording (Using the TV Guide System)
Refer to “Important notes for recording” (➡ 28)
Programme to HDD
and “Advanced timer recording” (➡ 34–37) for
detailed information.
1 Press [GUIDE].
SAT 10.01.2009 19:10
TV
TV Guide
^
All Types
All DVB Channels
SAT 10.01 Landscape
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
VOL
CH
DRIVE
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
SELECT
AV
News
News
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
News
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
Select Channel
OK
Info
OPTION
Page Up
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
Page Down
p
w
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the future
e r w q
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
programme and press [OK].
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
ꢁFollowing screen is displayed when the programme
currently broadcasting is selected.
STATUS
EXIT
EXIT
I
News
GUIDE
View
e, r, w, q
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
OK
OK
OPTION
REC
RETURN
RETURN
OPTION
CREATE
CHAPTER
Press [
,
e r
] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK].
REC MODE
TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:24 DR
THU 01.01.2009 13:09
All DVB Channels
1 day
Channel
21
Date
Start
Stop
Drive
HDD
Mode
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
THU 01.01 13:10
13:50
DR
[Prog.Name]
Programme Name
ABC Asia Pacific News
Thu, 01 January 2009
ABC Asia Pacific News
ABC 2
13:00 - 13:59, 59 min.
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
Genre: News
Rating: G
OK
ꢁYou can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
Favourites/AV
1 day/Weekly Page Down CH
RETURN
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
ꢁConfirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
Preparation
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
ꢁTurn on this unit.
[
,
,
,
e r w q
] (➡ 34, step 3).
3 Press [ , ] to select “Mode” and
w q
ꢁMake sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 94).
change recording mode with [ , ].
e r
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
Note
oday’s show we will...
ꢁTV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.
ꢁIf “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 92), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
z
Timer icon
ꢁThe receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
“
” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
z
standby has been activated.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9428
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
Programme to a disc
screen
1 Press [
,
,
e r w q
,
] to select the programme in the TV Guide and
BD-RE BD-R RAM
press [OK].
2 Press [
ꢁOnly 1 programme can be set to timer record on the disc.
,
] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“ ” in the TV Guide
w q
z
disappears.)
1 Insert a disc.
■ To modify the timer recording on the TV Guide
■ When the screen with “Format Disc” is
screen
displayed
1 Press [
,
,
,
] to select the programme you want to modify
e r w q
You need to format the unrecorded disc such as new
in the TV Guide and press [OPTION].
discs.
e.g.,
Menu
View
DVD-RAM
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
Copy
Format Disc
This disc is not formatted and cannot be played.
To format the disc, please select “Format Disc”.
2 Press [
,
] to select “Timer Rec Edit” and press [OK].
e r
(➡ 34, step 3)
OK
RETURN
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Format Disc” and press [OK].
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
] to select “Start” and press [OK].
e r
,
■ To release the unit from recording standby
w q
,
w q
(➡ 35)
■ When the screen without “Format Disc” is
■ To cancel recording when recording has already
displayed
begun (➡ 35)
The disc is already formatted.
Press [RETURN ].
■ Notes on timer recording (➡ 36)
2 Press [GUIDE].
3 Press [ , , , ] to select the future
e r w q
programme and press [OK].
ꢁPress [
,
] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK] if the
e r
programme currently broadcasting is selected.
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:24 DR
THU 01.01.2009 13:09
All DVB Channels
1 day
Channel
21
Date
Start
Stop
Drive
HDD
Mode
THU 01.01 13:10
13:50
DR
[Prog.Name]
Programme Name
ABC Asia Pacific News
Thu, 01 January 2009
ABC Asia Pacific News
ABC 2
13:00 - 13:59, 59 min.
Genre: News
Rating: G
OK
Favourites/AV
1 day/Weekly Page Down CH
RETURN
ꢁConfirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using [
,
e
, ,
r w q
] (➡ 34, step 3).
4 Press [ , ] to select “Drive” and
w q
press [ , ] to select “BD”.
e r
5 Press [ , ] to select “Mode” and
w q
change recording mode with [ , ].
e r
ꢁModes that can be selected are different depending on the
disc.
BD-RE BD-R
: All recording mode
RAM
: XP, SP, LP, EP and FR
6 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
oday’s show we will...
z
Timer icon
“
z
” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9428
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting titles
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
TV
1
While stopped
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
e r
abc
def
2
3
1
press [OK].
ghi
jkl
mno
4
5
6
p
w
DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
7
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
Title Name
Date Channel Time
DEL
DEL
0
SELECT
25.05
01.01 AV2
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
u, i
0:00(DR)
h
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
Not viewed
OK
Page 01/01
STATUS
EXIT
Select
PICTURE
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
EXIT
I
HDD BD-RE RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
Switching of the Navigator (➡ 40)
e, r, w, q
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the
option menu. (➡ 46, step 4)
OPTION
REC
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
“Red”
3 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
REC MODE
TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
press [ ].
h
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
ꢁA title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
ꢁTitle that is currently recording cannot be deleted.
ꢁTitles on the disc cannot be deleted in the following cases:
–While recording to disc
To show other pages
Press [
,
u i
].
4 Press [OK].
–While high speed copying
5 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or BD drive.
Select “BD” for DVD. BD indicator will light up.
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
BD-RE BD-R RAM
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 84, Setting the
protection).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
■ Available disc space after deleting
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
HDD BD-RE RAM
ꢁ
The space deleted becomes available for
recording.
Deleting during play
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles.
1
While playing
Press [DEL].
Last title Available disc
recorded space
Title
Title
.....
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
-RW(V) +RW
ꢁ
Available recording space increases only when
the last recorded title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting.
Available disc space
increases after deleting.
Last title Available disc
Title
Title
Title
.....
recorded
space
Later recorded
titles
Last title Available disc
recorded space
Deleted
.....
This space becomes available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
BD-R -R -R DL +R +R DL
Available space does not increase
even after the contents are deleted.
ꢁ
RQT9428
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Create List Grouped Titles
HDD
Date Channel Time
Title Name
Title
TV
25.05
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 AV2
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
VOL
DRIVE
CH
Time
Rec time
12:36
SELECT
AV
0:52(SP)
61 MB
Size
PAGE
CH
abc
def
2
3
1
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OPTION
RETURN
ghi
jkl
mno
4
7
5
6
p
w
3 Press [
,
] to select the title and press [ ].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
e r
h
qrs
tuv
xyz
8
9
MANUAL SKIP
INPUT
DEL
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
u, i
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
h
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STATUS
EXIT
ꢁWhen copying to a disc using high speed mode, only titles
I
indicated with “
ꢁTo show other pages
Press [ ].
” can be registered.
,
u i
OK
4 Press [OK].
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ 55)
You cannot start copying when the value of “Size” (➡ 55)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).
5 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
e, r, w, q
OPTION
REC
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC MODE
TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
6 Set to make it possible to play on
HDD
BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
p
other equipment.
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
(“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”)
HDD
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
only)
(
p
1 Insert a disc.
1 Press [
,
] to select “Other setting” and press [ ].
q
e r
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [
e.g.,
,
] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
e r
DVD-RAM
ꢁIf “On” is selected
Play
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
–
After finalising, the discs
Copy
become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or
edit.
DVD-RAM is inserted.
+RW
–
Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
OK
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
RETURN
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
e r
7 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
press [OK].
and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
1 Copy Direction
8 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
HDD
BD / DVD
Destination
BD / DVD
2 Copy Mode
[OK] to start copying.
VIDEO High Speed
Information of the copy destination
-
-
DVD-RAM
Copy restricted titles can be
3 Create List
0
copied on to disc
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
To return to the previous screen
3 Set the copy direction.
Press [RETURN ].
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
,
] to select “Copy Direction” and press [ ].
e r
q
] to select “Source” and press [OK].
] to select “HDD” and press [OK].
■ Copying list icons and functions (➡ 55)
e r
,
e r
■ To check the properties of a title and sort
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“BD/DVD”.
Copying list (➡ 55)
4 Press [
,
] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
e r
5 Press [
,
] to select “BD/DVD” and press [OK].
e r
Note
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
ꢁTitles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
ꢁTitles recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC)
from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be
copied.
4 Set the recording mode.
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
4 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select “Copy Mode” and press [ ].
e r
q
,
] to select “Format” and press [OK].
] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
] to select “Recording Mode” and press
e r
,
e r
,
e r
5 Press [
,
] to select the mode and press [OK].
e r
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
5 Register titles for copy.
1 Press [
,
e r
] to select “Create List” and press [ ].
q
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343 MB
(
0% )
Size:
0 MB
Title
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
HDD
BD / DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
3 Create List
0
RQT9428
Start Copying
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
Create copy list.
27
OPTION
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes for recording
Recording to HDD
Recording to discs
Recording or timer recording is performed in any recording mode using this unit’s tuner.
ꢁRecording or timer recording from external equipment is performed in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode.
BD-RE BD-R
Timer recording is performed in any recording mode using this unit’s tuner.
ꢁYou cannot record by pressing [ REC].
*
ꢁRecording from external equipment is performed in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode.
RAM
Timer recording is performed in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode using this unit’s tuner.
RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Recording from external input is possible in FR mode.
ꢁRecording methods differ depending on discs (➡ 30).
Recording mode
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs. (➡ 30)
High definition quality
image
Quality of titles to be recorded differs depending on the recording mode. (➡ 30)
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode /When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed
Recorded as high definition quality.
ꢁWhen recording or copying in HG, HX, HE, HL modes
Recorded as high definition quality with compressed broadcast data.
ꢁWhen recording or copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
Recorded as standard definition quality.
Broadcast in multi-
channel sound
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in multi channel broadcast [“
bottom of digital channel information display (➡ 21)].
” appears at the
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode /When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed
All multiple audio are recorded. It is possible to switch audio during the playback of the title.
ꢁWhen recording or copying in HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
Only one audio is recorded.
Before copying
–“Copy”: Select the audio with “Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast” in the Setup menu (➡ 91).
–“Copy Title Playing”: Select the audio with “Audio Selection” in the Disc menu (➡ 80).
Programmes with
subtitles
It is possible to display the subtitles when receiving a programme with the subtitles.
[“ ” appears at the bottom of digital channel information display (➡ 21)]
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode/When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed
Subtitles will be recorded as is. It is possible to switch the subtitles during the playback of the title.
ꢁWhen recording or copying in HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
Subtitles will not be recorded.
Surround audio
You can enjoy surround audio when receiving a programme with surround audio (➡ 30).
ꢁWhen recording in DR mode/When copying the title recorded in DR mode at high speed
It is recorded as is.
ꢁWhen recording or copying in HG, HX, HE, HL modes
It is recorded with surround audio that was converted from broadcasted audio format.
ꢁWhen recording or copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes
It is recorded with stereo audio.
16:9 image such as wide ꢁWhen recording in HG, HX, HE, HL modes.
broadcasting
ꢁWhen “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu is “On”
–Record in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes from external equipment.
–Copy from the finalised disc (DVD-Video) to the HDD
-R -R DL -RW(V)
ꢁWhen recording to
It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 89) in the Setup menu.
ꢁIn the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”, recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
When the recording mode is set to “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
High Speed Copy
Speed to copy the title recorded on the HDD to a disc differs depending on the recording mode of the title and
the disc to copy.
Title in DR mode
BD-RE BD-R
Title can be copied at high speed.
Title in HG, HX, HE, or HL modes
BD-RE BD-R
Title can be copied at high speed.
Title in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
BD-RE BD-R
Title cannot be copied at high speed.
Title can be copied at high speed.
RAM
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Title can be copied at high speed if “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before the programme is recorded
to HDD. (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 90)
But in the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
+R +R DL +RW
+R +R DL +RW
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
–
–
Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
RQT9428
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BD-RE BD-R
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
Playing the disc on
other players
Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE or HL mode may not playback on other Blu-ray disc player.(➡ 8)
The disc must be finalised (➡ 86)
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them.You can then play them
as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.ꢃ
ꢃ
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW. (➡ 85)
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
C
!
!
/
I
!!
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
!!
!!
!!
!
!
/
!
!
!!
/!!
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
!!OPEN/CLOSE
H
SEARC
ENTER
V
O
L
LA
Y
DISP
U
T
OP
MEN
URN
RET
NU
ME
O
N
OFF
DC
IN
9V
Finalise
EN
OP
D
UN
RO
UR
A.S
E
EP
EA
T
R
R
MOD
I
T
O
MON
ODE
M
E
TUR
PIC
+RW
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➡ 86).
Recording to DVD-R DL
and +R DL
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
RQT9428
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Recording modes
This also explains about while recording and while copying. (There are discs that can only copy, depending on the disc)
Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs.
Recording mode
DR
HG, HX, HE, HL
XP, SP, LP, EP
FR
Flexible Recording Mode
Features
Record with the same
quality of the broadcast
Record high definition
programme as
Record in quality as in
conventional analogue
broadcast
Record in quality as in
conventional analogue
broadcast
Record by automatically
adjusting the quality
between XP, and EP
(8 hours) depending on the
remaining area on the disc
compressedꢃHigh
Definition data
ꢃ
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
encoding
Quality that can
be recorded
Quality same as
broadcasted
(HD quality and SD quality) data (HD quality and SD
quality)
Quality produced by
conversion of broadcast
SD quality only
Multiple audio
Record all multiple audio
Record only one audio
ꢁBefore recording
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio to record (➡ 20).
ꢁBefore copying
–“Copy”: Select the audio with “Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast” in the Setup menu
(➡ 91).
–“Copy Title Playing”: Select the audio with “Audio Selection” in the Disc menu (➡ 80).
Subtitles
Can be recorded
Cannot be recorded
The audio of the
surround
programme
Surround audio as the
broadcast
Surround Audio produced
by conversion of broadcast
audio formatꢃ
Stereo audio
ꢃ
If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output from two front
speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch speaker connection.
■ Recording method
(ꢂ:Possible, –:Impossible)
BD-RE
BD-R
-R
-RW(V)
+R
+RW
-R DL
+R DL
HDD
RAM
Recording method
(DR, HG, HX, HE, HL)
ꢂ
ꢂ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Recordingꢃ
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
1
–
–
(DR, HG, HX, HE, HL)
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
–
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
–
–
Timer Recordingꢃ
2
ꢂ
ꢂ
–
(DR, HG, HX, HE, HL)
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
Flexible Recording
–
–
–
ꢂ
–
–
–
(DR, HG, HX, HE, HL)
–
–
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
Recording via AV2 input
–
–
–
ꢂ
–
–
ꢂ
–
–
ꢂ
–
–
ꢂ
–
–
–
–
–
–
(DR, HG, HX, HE, HL)
(XP, SP, LP, EP)
(FR)
–
DV Automatic
Recording
ꢂ
–
ꢂ
–
ꢂ
–
ꢂ
–
ꢂ
–
ꢃ1Recording from external equipment connected to AV1 or AV2, you cannot select DR, HG, HX, HE, HL or FR mode.
ꢃ2Timer Recording from external equipment connected to AV1 or AV2, you cannot select DR, HG, HX, HE or HL mode.
■ Maximum number of titles that can be recorded
HDD
ꢁYou can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
BD-RE BD-R
ꢁYou can record up to 200 titles on one disc.
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
ꢁYou can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
+R +R DL +RW
ꢁYou can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
■ FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or recording from external equipment. The unit automatically selects a recording rate
between XP and EP (8 hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
ꢁWhen recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
RQT9428
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
Recording Mode
HDD
BD-RE
BD-R
(25 GB)
BD-RE DL
BD-R DL
(50 GB)
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
DVD-R DL
+R DL
(8.5 GB)
DMR-BW850
DMR-BW750
Single-
Double-
sidedꢃ2
(9.4 GB)
(500 GB)
(250 GB)
sided
+RW
(4.7 GB)
(4.7 GB)
DRꢃ1
(High Definition
Quality: 15 Mbps)
72 hours
36 hours
66 hours
3 hours
20 min.
6 hours 40 min.
13 hours
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
DRꢃ1
135 hours
6 hours 30
min.
–
(Standard Definition
Quality: 8 Mbps)
HG
HX
HE
HL
XP
SP
LP
80 hours
120 hours
180 hours
240 hours
110 hours
220 hours
442 hours
40 hours
60 hours
90 hours
120 hours
55 hours
110 hours
221 hours
4 hours
6 hours
9 hours
12 hours
8 hours
12 hours
18 hours
24 hours
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 hours 15 min. 10 hours 30 min.
1 hour
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
4 hours
8 hours
1 hour
2 hours
4 hours
1 hour 45 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
10 hours 30 min.
21 hours
21 hours
42 hours
EPꢃ3
885 hours
(664
441 hours
(331
42 hours
(31 hours 30
min.ꢃ4)
84 hours
8 hours
(6
16 hours
(12
8 hours
14 hours 20 min.
(10 hours 45
min.ꢃ4)
(63 hoursꢃ4)
(6 hoursꢃ4)
hoursꢃ4)
hoursꢃ4)
hoursꢃ4)
hoursꢃ4)
ꢃ1 Recording time of DR mode depends on bit rate of broadcasting.
ꢃ2 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
ꢃ3 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs.
ꢃ4
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 Hours” in the Setup menu (➡ 89).The sound quality is better when using “6 Hours” than when using “8 Hours”.
RAM
ꢁ
When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 Hours” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. Use
“6 Hours” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
■ Regarding recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording.
ꢁRemaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of 15 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast, so the displayed
remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.
2 programmes simultaneous recording
It is possible to record 2 programmes simultaneously.
Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording
To record both programmes
to the HDD
and
HDD
HDD
Digital broadcast
(DR mode)
Digital broadcast
or
external input
BD-RE
BD-R
DVD-RAM
To record 1 programme each
onto the HDD and the disc
HDD
and
Digital broadcast
(DR mode)
(When timer recording)
Digital broadcast
or
external input
To perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording, 1 programme out of the 2 needs to be recorded to the
HDD in “DR” mode.
Note
ꢁ2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions:
–2 programmes from the external input
–While recording from DV input, or executing “Recording via AV2 input”
–While high speed copying
RQT9428
31
–2 programmes on same channel cannot be recorded simultaneously by pressing [ REC].
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Flexible Recording
Playing while you are recording
Chasing playback
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
HDD
Playback from the beginning of the title in to the HDD, while the title
is being recorded to the HDD.
The title is recorded to the size of a new DVD (4.7GB) by
automatically selecting optimal quality between XP and EP
(8 hours).
Simultaneous rec and play
Playback the previously recorded title while recording onto the HDD
or timer recording onto the disc.
Preparation
ꢁSelect the channel or the external input to record.
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
However, disc cannot be played back while timer recording onto the
disc.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
1
While stopped
HDD or BD drive.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
ꢁSelect “BD” for DVD.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
G
rouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
3 Press [ , ] to select “Flexible
e r
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
Date Channel Time
Title Name
Recording” and press [OK].
25.05
01.01 AV2
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
Flexible Rec
Recording FR mode.
Maximum recording time
Not viewed
Page 01/01
8 hour 00 min.
Set recording time
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
8
00
Min.
Hour
Start Cancel
“
” is displayed on the recording programme.
*
OK
RETURN
3 Press [ , ] to select a title and press
e r
[OK].
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording time in
EP (8 hours) mode.
To stop play
Press [ ].
g
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
4 Press [ , ] to select “Hour” and
w q
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
“Min.” and press [ , ] to set the
e r
Note
ꢁ“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
ꢁDepending on the state of the unit, playback may not be
possible.(➡ 103)
recording time.
ꢁYou can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
ꢁYou cannot record more than 8 hours.
5
When you want to start recording
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
ꢁRecording starts.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN ].
To stop recording partway
Press [ ].
g
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
RQT9428
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation during Recording
Check the recording
programme
Press [STATUS ].
e.g., while 2 programmes simultaneous recording
Recording programme
displayed on the TV screen
HDD
REC1
090 NINE HD
Recording programme not
displayed on the TV screen
002 ABC TV REC2
It is necessary to display the recording programme onto the TV screen to perform operations such as
pause.
Display the recording
programme on the TV
screen
ꢁIf the input was switched:
ꢁIf the channel was switched: Press [
Press [INPUT SELECT].
CH].
1 2
ꢁIf the drive was switched:
Press [DRIVE SELECT].
It is necessary to display the programme you want to stop on the TV screen. (➡ above)
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
ꢁFrom the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
It is necessary to display the programme you want to pause on the TV screen. (➡ above)
To pause recording
Press [ ].
h
ꢁPress again to restart recording.
You can also press [ REC] to restart.
*
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
ꢁIf paused while recording in DR mode, the paused part may become a still picture for a moment during
playback of that programme.
Press [INPUT SELECT].
Switch the input
Press [
CH].
1 2
Switch to other channel
Record other programme with steps 1–5 on page 23.
Perform 2 programmes
simultaneous recording
ꢁOne of the 2 programmes needs to be digital broadcasting recorded with DR mode.
“REC1” and “REC2” will light
REC1
REC2
ꢁChannel switch / input switch while performing 2 programme simultaneous recording will switch
between the 2 recording programmes.
RQT9428
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
Manually programming timer
recordings
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer icon
” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
z
Timer Recording Remain HDD
Channel Name
30:30 DR
Schedule
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
Drive/Mode
Space
“
z
New Timer Programme
standby has been activated.
od
Space
OK
Check for available space
on HDD, etc., when “!” is
displayed.
OK
RETURN
Total 0/32
Timer Off
Page UP
Page Down
DEL Delete
History List
CH
2 Press [ , ] to select “New Timer
e r
Programme” and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
3 Press [ , ] to select the items and
w q
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
change the items with [ , ].
e r
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:30 DR
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
All DVB Channels
1 day
Channel Date/Week Start
21 FRI 23.01 13:10
Stop
Drive
HDD
Mode
13:50
DR
[Prog.Name]
Programme Name
ABC Asia Pacific News
FRI, 23 January 2009
ABC Asia Pacific News
ABC 2
13:00 - 13:59, 59 min.
Genre: News
Rating: G
OK
Favourites/AV
1 day/Weekly Page Down CH
RETURN
ꢁChannel
Select the channel to record
“AV1” or “AV2” can be selected when “AV input” is selected
in “Favourites”.You can select “All DVB Channels”,
“Favourites 1”, “Favourites 2”, “Favourites 3”, “Favourites 4”
or “AV input” by pressing the “Red” button only when
“Channel” is selected.
ꢁDate/Week
You can select current date up to one month later minus
one day.You can select “1day” or “Weekly” by pressing the
“Green” button only when “Date/Week” is selected.
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the Direct Navigator
screen (➡ 40) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
ꢁStart/Stop
Press and hold [
,
] to alter the Start (Start time) and
e r
Stop (Finish time) in 15-minute increments.
ꢁDrive
Only 1 programme can be set to timer record on the disc.
When the recording drive is “BD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to “HDD”
(➡ 35, Relief Recording).
ꢁMode
Recording modes (➡ 30)
ꢁRenew (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 35)
ꢁProgramme Name
Press [OK]. (➡ 76, Entering text)
RQT9428
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DMR-BW85500GGLL__eenn..iinnddbb 3344
2009/04/08 午前 1100::0000::5522
To release the unit from recording
standby
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [INPUT SELECT] or [
1 2
CH] to display the programme that
you want to stop recording on the TV screen while 2 programmes
are simultaneously recording.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
1 Press [ ].
g
2 Press [ , ] to select the programme
e r
e.g.,
and press the “Red” button.
Stop Recording
ꢁThe timer icon “ ” (➡ 36) will change to grey.
z
Recording [ ABC TV 022 ]
ꢁYou cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “ ” (red) remains in the timer recording
list.
z
Timer recording of this programme in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
ꢁPress the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby. (The timer icon “ ” will change to red.)
z
Yes
No
OK
RETURN
Relief Recording
When the recording drive is “BD” and there is not enough remaining
space, recording automatically switches to “HDD”. If there is no disc
in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when timer
recording starts while copying, etc., the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
ꢁThe Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 40).
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK].
ꢁIf you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly, daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
ꢁIf the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
Auto Renewal Recording
HDD
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [ , ] to select the programme
e r
and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Renew”
w q
column.
4 Press [ , ] to select “ON” and press
e r
[OK].
Note
ꢁIf a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
ꢁWhen there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
RQT9428
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme
Notes on timer recording
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
ꢁOnly 1 programme can be set to timer record on the disc.
ꢁTimer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set.
ꢁIf “TV System” (➡ 92) in the Setup menu was modified to playback
a disc or a title while on timer recording standby, return the setting
to original before the recording is started.
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer Recording Remain HDD
30:30 DR
Schedule
FRI 23.01.2009 8:59
Channel Name
Drive/Mode
Space
ꢁTimer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
ꢁTimer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
ꢁIf the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
ABC2
FRI 23.01
9:00 - 9:30
HDD
DR
OK
z
z
Programme Name
ABC2
Programme Name
FRI 23.01
10:00 - 10:30
HDD
DR
OK
OK
OK
ABC TV Sydney
Programme Name
ABC TV Sydney
Programme Name
SAT 24.01
9:00 - 9:30
SAT 24.01
11:00 - 11:30
HDD
DR
HDD
DR
z
z
New Timer Programme
ꢁWhen you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, last 1 minute of earlier
programme will not be recorded unless it can perform 2
programmes simultaneous recording.
OK
RETURN
Total 4/32
Timer Off
Page Up
Page Down
DEL Delete
History List
CH
Programme
Programme
Icons
z
Not recorded
Red:Timer recording standby is activated.
Grey:Timer recording standby is not activated.
This programme is currently recording.
Part or all of the programme will not be recorded since
the programme is overlapping.
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 35).
Recorded
Recorded
*
First 1 minute of the following programme is not recorded either if
the following programme set to be recorded is also BD.
ꢁIf the start of 2 timer recordings overlap with each other when 2
programme simultaneous recording is not possible, the
programme with the earlier start time will be recorded.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
(➡ 103)
Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the
HDD.
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining
space.
For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
It may not be possible to record because:
ꢁthere is not enough space left.
J (Date):
! :
ꢁthe number of possible titles has reached its
maximum. (➡ 30)
■ To change a programme
e r
Press [
step 3)
,
] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 34,
■ To delete a programme
e r
Press [
,
] to select the programme and press [DEL].
■ Confirm the History List
1
2
Press the “Green” button.
Press [
,
] to select the programme and press [OK].
e r
ꢁReason why the timer recording failed or similar can be
confirmed.
ꢁPress the “Green” button to return to the previous screen.
■ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Note
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9428
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DMR-BW85500GGLL__eenn..iinnddbb 3366
2009/04/08 午前 1100::0000::5533
■ When the TV Guide displays the empty TV Guide
Operations in the TV Guide system
list
Basic operations
TUE 13.01.2009 19:45
TV Guide
TUE 13.01 Landscape
All Types
All DVB Channels
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait
view.
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
The “empty” field
Landscape view
News
ꢁSome digital broadcast may not send programme information. Set
the timer recording manually (➡ 34).
TUE 13.01.2009 19:45
TV Guide
TUE 13.01 Landscape
All Types
All DVB Channels
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or Favourites
News
News
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or Favourites.
News
Select Channel
OK
Info
OPTION
Page Up
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
Page Down
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
1
From the desired programme type
Press the “Yellow” button to display
the list of programme type.
From the desired Favourites
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of Favourites.
Portrait view
TUE 13.01.2009 19:45
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
TUE 13.01
Portrait
All Types
ABC 1
ABC 2
2 Press [ , ] to select the desired
e r
item.
Prog.type
All Types
Favourites
Select Programme
OK
All DVB Channels
Info
OPTION
Page Up
CH
Select Service
RETURN
GUIDE
+24 Hr
Portrait/Landscape
Page Down
Favourites
Prog. type
All DVB Channels
Favourites 1
Favourites 2
Favourites 3
Favourites 4
All Types
Movies
News
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
To change channels Landscape view
Press [ ] to select a channel.
,
e r
Portrait view
Press [ ] to select a channel.
,
w q
Music
Arts/Culture
Current Affairs
Education/Information
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
To view a
programme list for
another day
ꢁJump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
ꢁJump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
3 Press [OK].
ꢁA list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
ꢁWhen you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
When jumping, the selected time period
may deviate.
e.g.,
Programme type,
“News” is
selected in step 2
of Landscape
view.
To browse through
the TV Guide list
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
symbol)
Press [
CH].
1 2
TUE 13.01.2009 19:45
All DVB Channels
TV Guide
TUE 13.01 Landscape
News
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
Press [STATUS ].
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time,
description) is available for these
programmes.
News
News
News
CH
Select Channel
OK
Info
OPTION
Page Up
Press [
,
] to scroll up and down.
e r
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE
+24 Hr
Portrait/Landscape
Page Down
Favourites
Prog. type
To show other pages
Press [CH ] (Previous) or [ CH] (Next).
1
2
Note
Press [STATUS ] again to return to the
programme list.
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and profiles sent from broadcast
stations is correct.
4 Press [ , , , ] to select the
e r w q
programme.
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have
selected the programme type or favourites
Select “All Types” of the programme type or “All DVB Channels” of
the favourites in step 2 above.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TV Guide data download
ꢁDownload automatically while the unit is turned on.
RQT9428
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced playback
ꢁRefer to page 42 for playing DivX.
ꢁRefer to page 62 for playing still pictures.
ꢁRefer to page 69 for playing music.
Note
ꢁWhen playing back a title recorded on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 92).
ꢁA disc or title with different “TV System” (➡ 92) may not be able to playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.You will be
able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change back the settings
before the recording starts.
ꢁDepending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
ꢁThe producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
ꢁDiscs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [ ] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television
g
screen and so on.
Operation during play
ꢁDepending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
Press [ ].
g
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
q
BD-V
On BD-Video discs including BD-J (➡ 118), the resume play function does not work.
Stopped position
HDD
ꢁ
:
Stopped position for each title is memorized.
ꢁDiscs: Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
AVCHD
ꢁ
(SD card), DivX : Only previous stopped position is memorized except DivX on a USB memory.
The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Press [ ].
h
Pause
Press [ ] again or [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
h
q
Press [
] or [
].
t
y
Search
+R +R DL +RW
ꢁThe speed increases up to 5 steps. (
up to 3 steps)
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
ꢁAudio is heard during first level search forward.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels search.
BD-V
ꢁ
Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
During play or while paused, press [
] or [
].
u
i
Skip
Skip to the title or chapter you want to play.
ꢁIt will skip to the beginning of chapters (➡ 49) if the title contains chapters.
HDD
ꢁ
It will not skip the title. But the title in the grouped titles during “Grouped Playback” (➡ 40) will be
skipped.
ꢁDivX : Press [
] to return to the beginning of the title currently playing.
u
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a selected
Play starts from the selected title or chapter.
title
BD-V AVCHD
ꢁ
BD-V DVD-V AVCHD
Input a 3-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
DVD-V
ꢁ
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
ꢁWhile stopped (the screen on the right is displayed on the television), the title
is designated. While playing, the chapter is designated.
Press and hold [ ] (PLAY/×1.3).
q
Quick View
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Except
ꢁPress again to return to normal speed.
-RW(V)
(It will not work even if it is
BD-V AVCHD
ꢁImage may not be played back smoothly in case of DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode titles or
.
finalised)
BD-V
ꢁ
Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
-RW(VR)
, DivX
While paused, press [
] or [
].
t
y
Slow-motion
Except DivX
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
BD-V AVCHD
ꢁ
Forward direction [
] only.
y
ꢁThe unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
BD-V DVD-V AVCHD
(excluding
).
BD-V
ꢁ
Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
While paused, press [ ] (
) or [ ] (
q
).
h q
w
w h
Frame-by-frame
Except DivX
Each press shows the next frame.
ꢁPress and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
BD-V AVCHD
ꢁ
Forward direction [ ] (
) only.
q
h q
BD-V
ꢁ
Only primary video is played while performing this operation.
RQT9428
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
Skipping the specified
2 Press [ , ] to select the time and press [OK].
e r
time (Time Slip)
Play skips the specified time.
, DivX ꢁEach time you press [
BD-V DVD-V AVCHD
Except
,
], the time increases [ ] or decreases [ ] by 1 minute intervals. (Press
e r
e
r
and hold for 10-minute intervals.)
This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show
the screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.
-5 min.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 1 minute later.
Manual Skip
Except DivX
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen (➡ 82)
Aspect
Chapters are divided at the point pressed. (➡ 49)
Create Chapter
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
Changing audio during play
Display the subtitle during play
HDD BD-RE BD-R BD-V RAM -RW(VR) DVD-V AVCHD
HDD BD-RE BD-R
DivX
It is possible to display the subtitles during the playback if the
programme with subtitle is recorded with DR mode.
Press [AUDIO].
It will switch depending on the contents recorded every time it is
pressed.
Press [STTL ].
ꢁIt will switch between On/Off every time it is pressed.
HDD
e.g.,
“Audio LR” is selected.
BD-V DVD-V AVCHD
DivX
HDD
Display with “Subtitle” in the Disc menu (➡ 80, Subtitle).
PLAY
Audio LR
eng
BD-V DVD-V AVCHD
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 80, Soundtrack).
1 ENG
Digital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided)
When switching layers:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-
sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough
space on the first layer to record a programme, the remainder is recorded
on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit
automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way
as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut
out when the unit is switching layers.
Video and audio may momentarily cut
Second recordable layer
The available
space
First recordable layer
Title 2
Title 1
(Outer section
of the disc)
(Inner
section of
the disc)
Playback direction
DVD-R DL
+R DL
RQT9428
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator
Direct Navigator screen icons
Playback the title that was viewed
once
You can choose to start the playback from the point you have last
stopped, or from the beginning when the resume play function
(➡ 38) is operating.
HDD
*
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection
1 While the Direct Navigator screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
×
Title cannot be played
(When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.)
2 Press [
w q
press [OK].
,
] to select “Play” and press [OK].
e r
3 Press [
,
] to select “Last Played” or “Beginning” and
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 35, Relief Recording)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 118, CPRM)
To sort the titles for easy searching
HDD
(All Titles screen only)
HDD
Groups of titles (
only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION].
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
HDD
(
only)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
ꢁAlter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 92).
2 Press [
,
] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
] to select the item and press [OK].
e r
,
3 Press [
e r
ꢁIf you exit the Direct Navigator screen, the sort will be cancelled.
HDD
To play grouped titles
Switching of the Navigator
HDD
(Grouped Titles screen only)
HDD
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles”
■ Play the selected titles
e r
It is possible to switch the screen display with the following
operation even in the DELETE Navigator screens.
1 Press [
,
] to select the group and press [OK].
] to select the title and press [OK].
2 Press [
,
e r
1 While the Navigator screen is displayed
■ Play the titles continuously (Grouped Playback)
Press [OPTION].
While the Grouped Titles screen is displayed,
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select the item and press [OK].
Press [
,
e r
] to select the group and press [ ](PLAY).
q
e.g.,
HDD
To edit the group of titles
Release Grouping
All Titles
HDD
(Grouped Titles screen only)
1 Press [ ] to select a title or a group and press [ ].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
HDD
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles”
,
e r
h
PICTURE / MUSIC
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording
mode are bundled and displayed as one item.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
2 Press [OPTION].
Create Group
3 Press [
[OK].
,
e r
] to select the option and press
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Release Grouping
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
Date Channel Time
Title Name
Born And Bred: Wrathful
25.05
01.01 AV2
A
2
1
12:36
1:35
Create Group:
Press [ ] to select “Create” and press [OK].
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
,
w q
0:00(DR)
ꢁSelected titles are bundled to form a group.
Not viewed
Release Grouping:
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
Press [
,
] to select “Release” and press [OK].
w q
RETURN
MUSIC
ꢁAll the titles in the group are released.
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
and press [OK] to display the
Remove:
(Only when titles in a group have been selected)
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
Press [
,
] to select “Remove” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁSelected titles are removed from the group.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles
Time Remaining
45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Title Name
■ Regarding the group name
No. Date Day Channel Time
001
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
12:36 Born And Bred:
25.05 SAT
A
Wrathful
Play School: Food Friday
002 25.05 SAT
12:37
AV2
01.01 SUN
01.01 SUN AV1
1:35
003
004
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR
Date Channel Time
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
1:13
Rec time
VIDEO
HDD
MUSIC
Title Name
12:36 Born And Bred: A Wrathful Go
PICTURE
MUSIC
Titles
PICTURE
0:00(DR)
Date Channel Time
Title Name
25.05
01.01 AV2
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
25.05
25.05
12:36
1:35
Not viewed
12:37 Play School: Food Friday
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Page 01/01
Rec time
ec time
0:00(DR)
Select
0:00(DR)
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
Not viewed
OK
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OPTION
Select
OPTION
VIDEO
OK
RETURN
RETURN
MUSIC
To change the group name
1
2
3
4
Press [
Press [
Press [
,
] to select the group and press [OPTION].
] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].
e r
,
e r
,
e r
Enter the name. (➡ 76, Entering text)
ꢁEven if the group name is changed, the title names in the group
will not be changed.
Note
ꢁThis function is only available for videos and not available for
music and still pictures.
RQT9428
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD)
AVCHD
To exit the screen
It is possible to playback the high definition video (AVCHD) recorded
on the Panasonic High definition Video Camera on the disc or SD
card.
Press [EXIT].
To display the top menu
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
1 Insert a disc or SD card.
When the top menu or “Direct Navigator” is not displayed
Refer to “Starting from a selected title” (➡ 38) to playback.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Play Video
e r
(AVCHD)” and press [OK].
Operation during play (➡ 38)
Note
RAM
e.g.,
ꢁSet “Play Video (AVCHD) on BD-RE/BD-R” to “On” in the Setup
menu for the disc that has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded
by the camcorder and high definition quality title that was recorded
on this unit. (➡ 89)
DVD-RAM ( AVCHD )
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
ꢁMultiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the
disc. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], and playback by selecting the
title.
This disc is play-only and cannot be recorded or
copied to.
OK
RETURN
ꢁIt may pause for a few seconds on the break of images when
editing such as partial deletion is performed.
ꢁHigh definition video (transfer rate of 24Mbps of faster) cannot be
played back correctly if it was recorded on a DVD compatible to
double speed or slower.
SD
e.g.,
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
ꢁIf the top menu of the disc or SD card to play was
–Created:
Display the top menu
–Not created:
Display the “Direct Navigator” screenꢃ
ꢃ
It may not be able to display the “Direct Navigator” screen
3 dePpernedisngson[ the, equ,ipme,nt u]setdotosreecloerdc. t the title
e r w q
and press [OK].
SD
e.g.,
Direct Navigator screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Video(AVCHD )
SD CARD
VIDEO
No. Date Day Time
Title Name
Fantasista
001 15.12 SAT 19:36
12:35 2007.12.07
002 07.12 FRI
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Rec time
00:00.07
Page 01/01
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
Playback of the playlist created on other equipment
BD-RE BD-R RAM -RW(VR)
4 Press [ , , , ] to select the
e r w q
Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
playlist and press [OK].
Preparation
ꢁInsert a disc.
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive.
Select “BD” for DVD.
Playlists
DVD-RAM
Playlist View
- -
- -
01
02
05.06(THU) 0:12.12
- -
05.07(MON) 0:07:31
- -
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Previous
Next
Page 01/01
OK
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
OPTION
RETURN
press [OK].
Operation during play (➡ 38)
RAM
e.g.,
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
FUNCTION MENU
4:00 EP
DVD-RAM
Time Remaining
Playback
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playlists
Recording
Delete
DV Automatic Recording
Recording via AV2 input
Network
Copy
DVD Management
Setup
TV Guide
Others
OK
RETURN
3 Press [ , ] to select “Playlists” and
e r
press [OK].
RQT9428
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Playing DivX video contents
-R -R DL CD USB
1 While the file list is displayed
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official
DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Select Folder”.
e r
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Select Folder
F: Selected folder no./Total
folder no. including DivX
title.
F
1/21
12_02_2009
1 Insert a disc or USB memory.
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
-R -R DL CD USB
CD
e.g.,
CD
OK
RETURN
You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.
Page 01/01
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
3 Press [ , ] to select a folder and press [OK].
e r
Select file type.
The file list for the folder appears.
OK
RETURN
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
ꢁIt will go to step 3 automatically if it is only DivX that is
recorded.
USB
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Play Video
e r
(DivX)” and press [OK].
CD
e.g.,
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
DivX
No.
001
Title Name
ABC.divx
OK
RETURN
Select
OPTION
a
folder from OPTION menu.
Page 01/01
ꢁFiles are treated as titles.
3 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
To stop playing
Press [ ].
g
To show other pages
Press [
,
u i
].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
If the menu screen (➡ above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
-R -R DL CD USB
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
-R -R DL CD
Press [
, ] to select “Playback” and press [OK].
e r
USB
1 Press [
2 Press [
, ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
,
e r
] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
Note
ꢁPicture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect.You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
ꢁSuccessive play is not possible.
ꢁPlayback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive or the BD drive.
RQT9428
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX VOD content
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and
submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD
content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)
system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If
you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the
message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content
will not play.]
Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 94, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
DivX Registration
®
DivX Video On Demand
8 alphanumeric characters
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
ꢁAfter playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
ꢁIf you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number
of times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed.You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
When playing this content
ꢁThe number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
– you press [^].
– you press [g].
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– you press [u] or [t, y] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
– timer recording starts on the HDD.
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
ꢁResume functions work. The number of plays is not reduced when
you restart by resume play function.
RQT9428
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enjoy the BD Video which supports BONUSVIEW or BD-Live
BD-V
Enjoying BD-Live discs with Internet
Many BD-Live compatible discs require content to be downloaded
onto an SD card (➡ 118, Local storage) in order to access the
available BD-Live features.
What is BONUSVIEW?
BONUSVIEW allows you to enjoy functions such as picture-in-
picture or secondary audio etc., with BD-Video supporting BD-ROM
Profile 1 version 1.1/Final Standard Profile.
What is BD-Live?
ꢁAn SD card with 1 GB or more of free space (SD Speed Class
Rating 2 or higher) needs to be inserted prior to inserting the BD-
Live compatible disc.
In addition to the BONUSVIEW function, BD-Video supporting BD-
ROM profile 2 that has a network extension function allows you to
enjoy more functions such as subtitles, exclusive images and online
games by connecting this unit to the Internet. In order to use the
Internet feature, you must have this unit connected to a broadband
network. (➡ 102)
Some BD-Live content available on the Blu-ray discs may require an
Internet account to be created in order to access the BD-Live
content. Follow the screen display or instruction manual of the disc
for information on acquiring an account.
ꢁThese discs may not be on sale in certain regions.
ꢁThe usable functions and the operating method may vary with
each disc, please refer to the instructions on the disc and/or visit
their website.
Preparation
ꢁConnect to the network. (➡ 102)
ꢁSet “Network Settings” in the Setup menu. (➡ 96)
1 Insert an SD card (➡ 15).
ꢁIf the SD card menu screen is displayed, press [DRIVE
SELECT] on the remote control, select “BD”.
Playing secondary video (picture-in-
picture) and secondary audio
Secondary video can be played from a disc compatible with the
picture-in-picture function.
2 Insert the disc (➡ 15).
ꢁFor operation method, refer to the instructions on the disc.
To use the above functions, it is recommended that you format the
card on this unit. (➡ 85)
For the playback method, refer to the instructions for the disc.
Note
Image of the secondary video
e.g.,
ꢁWhile using this feature, do not remove the SD card. Doing so will
cause playback to stop.
Secondary video
ꢁA message may be displayed when SD card doesn’t have enough
storage capacity for BD-Live content. Please make space available
on the current SD card, or insert another SD card.
ꢁThe unit must be connected to the Internet and set up (➡ 96) to
use the BD-Live functions. “BD-Live Internet Access” may need to
be changed for certain discs (➡ 89).
ꢁWhen discs supporting BD-Live are played back, the player or disc
IDs may be sent to the content provider via the Internet.
ꢁThe unit is connected to the Internet when BD-Live functions are
used, generating communication charges.
ꢁThe playback may be paused depending on the communication
environment. Some functions may be disabled to prevent skipping
to sections that have not been downloaded, etc.
Primary video
When the secondary video does not display
Turn “Video” and “Soundtrack” to “On” in “Secondary Video” in
“Signal Type” in the Disc menu. (➡ 80)
ꢁTo output the audio of the secondary video, set “BD-Video
Secondary Audio” to “On” in the Setup menu (➡ 91).
Note
ꢁDiscs may not always be played back according to the settings on
this unit, as certain playback formats are prioritized on certain
discs.
ꢁOnly the primary video is played during search/slow-motion or
frame-by-frame.
ꢁWhen the secondary video is turned off, the secondary audio is
not be played.
RQT9428
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enjoy High Bit rate Audio and Video
Enjoying High Bit rate Audio with 7.1ch speaker
This unit can decode high bit rate audio (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio and DTS-HD Master Audio) adopted
in BD-Video.
To enjoy 7.1ch surround sound, the following conditions are necessary (Part shown in the shaded area of table given below).
ꢁConnect an amplifier/receiver with 7.1ch speaker supporting HDMI (High Bit rate Audio) using a High Speed HDMI cable. (➡ 100)
ꢁSet “BD-Video Secondary Audio” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (➡ 91)
ꢁSet “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD” or “DTS/DTS-HD” to “Bitstream” or “PCM” in the Setup menu. (➡ 91)
About audio from audio output terminal
Connect an amplifier/receiver and confirm the desired audio type and necessary settings (“BD-Video Secondary Audio”, “Dolby D/Dolby D +/
Dolby TrueHD” or “DTS/DTS-HD”).
ꢁThe number of channels listed is the maximum possible number of output channels.
ꢁAlso, depending on the specifications or the settings of the amplifier/receiver, the results of the output may vary.
Terminal
HDMI AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
“Dolby D/Dolby D +/
Dolby TrueHD”/
“DTS/DTS-HD”
“BD-Video
Secondary Audio”
“Bitstream”ꢃ1
“On”ꢃ2
“PCM”ꢃ3
“Bitstream”
“PCM”
“Off”
“On”
“Off”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital
EXꢃ6
Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital
EXꢃ6
Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital/
Dolby Digital EX
5.1ch PCM
Dolby Digital EXꢃ5
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital
5.1ch PCMꢃ2
ꢃ7.1ch PCM
Dolby Digital
DVD-V
DTS Digital
Surround/
DTS-ESꢃ5
DTS Digital
Surround/DTS-
ESꢃ6
DTS Digital
Surround/
DTS-ES
5.1ch PCM
7.1ch PCMꢃ4
DTS Digital
Surround/
DTS-ESꢃ6
Down-mixed 2ch
PCM
BD-V
DTS-HD High
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
DTS-HD Master
Audio
Resolution Audio
DTS Digital
Surround
DTS Digital
Surround
7.1ch PCMꢃ4
DTS-HD Master
Audio
Down-mixed
5.1ch PCM
Down-mixed
5.1ch PCMꢃ2
Down-mixed 2ch
PCM
7.1ch LPCM
7.1ch PCM
7.1ch PCM
ꢃ1 When the connected equipment is not supported with these audio format, the audio is output as Dolby Digital bitstream, DTS Digital Surround
bitstream or down-mixed 2ch PCM (e.g., TV).
ꢃ2
BD-V
: When playing BD-Video without secondary audio or clicking sound, the audio is output as the same format as if “BD-Video Secondary
Audio” was set to “Off” in the Setup menu. (➡ 91)
ꢃ3 When the connected equipment is not supported with multi channel surround, the audio is output as down-mixed 2ch PCM.
ꢃ4
BD-V
: When the connected equipment is supported with 7.1 channel surround, the audio output is amplified from 5.1ch or 6.1ch to 7.1ch
depending on the DTS, Inc. specifications.
ꢃ5 With PCM output, Dolby Digital EX becomes PCM audio decoded as Dolby Digital, DTS-ES recorded to DVD-Video becomes PCM audio
decoded as DTS Digital Surround, and DTS-ES recorded to BD-Video becomes PCM audio decoded as DTS-ES.
: When “BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On” in the Setup menu, Dolby Digital EX is output as Dolby Digital and DTS-ES is output
as DTS Digital Surround, however if playing BD-Video without secondary audio or clicking sound, the audio is output as the original format.
ꢃ6
BD-V
Note
ꢁWhen setting “BD-Video Secondary Audio” to “Off” in the Setup menu, the clicking sound on the menu and audio with secondary video in
picture-in-picture mode (➡ 44) cannot be output.
Regarding 24p output
Many BD-Video movie contents are recorded in 24 frames/second in accordance with the film materials. However, they will normally be output in
60 frames/second in accordance with the display format.
These can be output in 24p as the original. Therefore, high-quality video can be enjoyed, such as the improved clarity, enhanced perspective,
etc.
Preparation
ꢁConnect to a TV supporting 1080/24p input via an HDMI cable.
ꢁSet “BD-Video 24p Output” to “On” in the Setup menu. (➡ 92)
RQT9428
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles
HDD BD-RE RAM
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
BD-R -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
+RW
(You cannot edit finalised discs.)
HDD BD-RE RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
-RW(VR)
Only “Properties” is possible.
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [ , ] to select the title.
Editing of the title can be performed with this unit.
For example, an unnecessary part of the title can be deleted. (➡ 47,
Partial Delete)
e r
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Date Channel Time Title Name
Titles
25.05
01.01 AV2
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
To show other pages
Press [ ].
Note
,
u i
Multiple editing
Select with [
ꢁOnce deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content
cannot be restored to its original state. Make certain before
proceeding.
,
] and press [ ]. (Repeat.)
e r
h
A check mark appears. Press [ ] again to cancel.
h
ꢁRestricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
3 Press [OPTION].
BD-R +R +R DL
ꢁ
Each time you edit a title the information is
saved to the free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times,
the amount of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
4 Press [ , ] to select the operation
e r
and press [OK].
ꢁIf you select “Edit”, press [
,
e r
] to select the operation and
Preparation
press [OK].
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
ꢁTurn the unit on.
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited. Select “BD” for DVD.
Play
BD-RE BD-R RAM
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 84, Setting the
Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 47).
Divide Title
Delete
protection).
Change Thumbnail
Title Compression
Properties
Edit
Chapter View
Create Group
Release Grouping
Edit or playback the chapter (➡ 49)
HDD
To edit the group of titles
(➡ 40)
All Titles
HDD
Switching of the Navigator
(➡ 40)
PICTURE / MUSIC
ꢁPlaying still pictures (➡ 62)
ꢁPlaying music recorded on HDD
(➡ 70)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9428
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 46)
Deleteꢃ
Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R
-R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
proceeding.
ꢁThe available recording space on BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you
delete titles.
ꢁAvailable recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last
recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (➡ 26).
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
ꢁPress [OK] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R
-R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
-RW(VR)
Dinosaur
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Channel AV2
You can give names to recorded titles.
(➡ 76, Entering text)
Enter Title Name
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R
-R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
HDD
ꢁ
Even if the group name is changed (➡ 40), the title names in the group will not be changed.
Set up Protectionꢃ
Cancel Protectionꢃ
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
Group
Time Remain
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Date
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM +R
+R DL +RW
25.05
01.01 AV
01.01 AV
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
Partial Delete
Time Remaining
HDD
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
008
PLAY
1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
Start
End
(➡ below, For your reference)
section you want to delete.
q
Next
ꢁPress [ ](PLAY) to start the playback when the title is paused.
Continue
0:43.21
2 Press [ , ] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
e r
Please set the start
point with playback
operation and skip.
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
ꢁSelect “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections. Up to 20
OK
Press RETURN to end Partial Delete function.
sections can be set. (go to step 1)
RETURN
3 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁChapter Mark is generated in the scene that was partially deleted.
4 Press [RETURN ].
You can divide a title into two.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
Divide Title
Time Remaining
HDD
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
008
PLAY
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
Divide
(➡ below, For your reference)
Preview
2 Press [ , ] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
e r
Continue
0:43.21
3 Press [ , ] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
w q
To confirm the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Press [
,
] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
e r
OK
RETURN
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [
the title.
,
e r
] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide
Note
ꢁThe divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 118) of the original title.
ꢁVideo and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
HDD
ꢁ
Divided titles form a group of titles.
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
It is possible to change the image
displayed on the top menu after finalising.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR ChangeThumbnail
Change Thumbnail
HDD
Time Remaining
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
008
h
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
Change
+RW
It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after
creating Top Menu.
(➡ below, For your reference)
ꢁNot for the titles with
displayed (➡ 40)
HDD
Settings for “Change Thumbnail” is saved when high speed copy is
Finish
0:00.00
performed to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW.
Start play and select the image of
a thumbnail.
Change
- -:- -.- -
OK
1 Press [ ] (PLAY) to start play.
RETURN
q
2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [
,
] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at
e r
the point you want to change.
3 Press [ , ] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
e r
ꢃMultiple editing is possible.
For your reference
ꢁUse Search (➡ 38), Time Slip (➡ 39) to find the desired point.
ꢁTo find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 38) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 38).
ꢁTo skip to the start or end of a title, press [
] (start) or [
] (end).
u
i
RQT9428
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 46)
Title
Compression
(Converting the recording
mode)
Title Compression is a function to convert the recording mode of the title in DR mode. The converted title will
be copied to HDD. It will take about the same time as playback of the title to convert the recording mode.
HDD
Title Compression
1 Press [ , ] to select “Recording Mode”.
e r
Compress the selected title by changing its recording
2 Press [ , ] to select the recording mode and
w q
mode.
press [ ].
r
HX -- Normal Quality (HD)
During standby
Recording Mode
Timing
3 Press [ , ] to select when to start the
w q
conversion.
Set
Cancel
“Now”
Conversion begins immediately after
step 5.
RETURN
Recording and playback are not
available during conversion. Note also
that Timer recording will not be
performed during conversion.
“During standby”
The conversion will be performed a short time after switching off the power in
a time slot for which no scheduled recording is set. If the power is switched on
during the conversion, the conversion will be cancelled, and start from the
beginning when the power is next switched off.
4 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select “Set” and press [OK].
e r w q
5 To begin the conversion “Now”:
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁTo cancel a conversion that is in progress
Press and hold [RETURN ] for more than 3 seconds.
To begin the conversion “During standby”:
Press [OK].
ꢁTo remove a conversion setting
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ above)
Press [
,
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁConversion begins soon after the power is switched off.
“COPY” on the unit’s display remains lighted during conversion. [Only when “Unit’s Display” in the Setup
menu is set to “Bright” (➡ 91).]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Date Channel
Time
Title Name
Titles
25.05
01.01
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
AV2
AV1
12:36
1:35
When “New title can be made
in standby” is displayed in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR, the
conversion has not finished.
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
New title can be
made in standby.
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
Note
ꢁTo use “Title Compression”, the HDD need enough storage capacity. Please make space available on the
HDD.
ꢁThe size of the converted programme may increase for some combinations of programme and recording
mode.
ꢁRecording mode conversion is paused when the power is turned on while the recording mode is converting
with power turned off. Conversion will start from the beginning again once the power is turned off.
ꢁThe original programme remains after conversion.
ꢁThe converted version of a programme including multiple video and audio content will contain only single
video and audio content. The “Audio Mode of Digital Broadcast” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 91) is applied.
ꢁSubtitles will not display anymore once a title with subtitles is converted.
ꢁWhen converting to XP mode, select the audio to record with “Audio Mode for XP Recording” before
converting the recording mode. (➡ 91)
ꢁSelect the audio to record when converting to “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” modes. (➡ 89, Audio Channels for
HG/HX/HE/HL Recording)
ꢁIn titles with the Auto Renewal Recording function (➡ 35) set, a programme may be unintentionally
converted while in “During standby”. So it is recommended to convert the recording mode by selecting
“Now”.
ꢁIf converted to the “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode, an image of the aspect ratio 4:3 becomes one of the
aspect ratio 16:9 with the side panel. (➡ 82)
RQT9428
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
4 Press [ , ] to select the chapter.
w q
To start play Press [OK].
-R -R DL -RW(V) -RW(VR) +R +R DL +RW
Only playback of
chapter is possible.
To edit Step 5.
To create Press the “Green” button. (➡ below)
Regarding Chapters
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
Time Remaining 15:08 SP VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Play
SOCCER
007
Press OK to start playing from
the selected chapter.
Selected chapter can be edited
via OPTION.
Press RETURN to go back to
previous menu.
Title
Chapter
0:00.00
001
End
Start
0:00.00
Page 001/001
OPTION
Select
OK
RETURN
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
You can divide a title into multiple
Chapter View
Edit Chapter Mark
chapters. Each section between the division points (Chapter
Marks) becomes a chapter.
5 Press [OPTION], then [ , ] to select
e r
Title
the operation and press [OK].
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Delete Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ below).
Combine Chapters
Chapter Mark
ꢁThe maximum number of items on a disc:
(Depends on the state of recording.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
HDD
: Approx. 1000 per title
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
BD-RE BD-R RAM
: Approx. 1000
Note
HDD
ꢁ
You will not be able to perform the Resume play function
Chapter operations
(➡ 38) or “Change Thumbnail” (➡ 47) with a title with the
maximum number of chapters.
HDD
used “Title Compression” (➡ 48). But, it will not maintain the
exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers.
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ left)
ꢁ
Chapter Marks created will be maintained when copied or
Select the point where you want to start a
new chapter while viewing the title.
Create
Chapter
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Edit Chapter Mark
Time Remaining
HDD
15:08 SP VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
SOCCER
Play
007
Create Chapter Mark
During the playback or pause
To insert chapter position,
press CREATE CHAPTER at
selected time.
Press RETURN to go to
Chapter View.
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
ꢁChapters are divided at the point pressed.
0:00.00
OK
RETURN
Chapter View
Edit Chapter Mark
1 Press [CREATE CHAPTER] at
the point you want to divide.
ꢁRepeat this step to divide at other
points.
2 Press [RETURN ] to go to
Chapter has been created.
Chapter View screen.
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
■ To delete the Chapter Mark
Press [ , ] to select “Delete”
w q
and press [OK].
Delete
1 While paused
Chapterꢃ
Press [
,
] and skip to the location you
u i
want to delete.
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain
before proceeding.
ꢁSelect “Combine Chapters” (➡ below)
when you only want to delete the division
point between chapters. (The recorded
contents will not be deleted.)
2 Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
Editing and playing chapters
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press [ , ] to select “Combine”
w q
and press [OK].
Combine
Chapters
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
ꢁThe selected chapter and following chapter
are combined.
Date Channel Time
Title Name Titles
25.05
01.01 AV2
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
ꢃ
0:00(DR)
Multiple editing is possible.
Not viewed
OK
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
HDD BD-RE RAM
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
press [OPTION].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Chapter View”
e r
RQT9428
and press [OK].
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
There are following copying methods.
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc. (➡ 53)
Make a copying list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles in the way you want. (➡ 54)
Copy
Copy AVCHD
High definition video (AVCHD format) can be copied from disc, SD card or USB. (➡ 60)
■ Copy direction
Copy source
Copy destination
Possible copying method
Copy speed
ꢁThe high speed copy may not be
possible depending on the
destination disc or the title to copy.
(➡ 52, When is the time high
speed copy is not possible?)
BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL
-RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Copy Title Playing
Copy
HDD
BD-RE
BD-R
HDD
Copy
Normal speed
RAM
-RW(VR)
HDD
HDD
Copy
Copy
High speed
+RW
Normal speed
Before finalise
-R
-R DL
-RW(V)
+R
Cannot copy
+R DL
DVD-V ꢃ
After finalise
-R
HDD
-R DL
-RW(V)
+R
Copy
Normal speed
High speed
+R DL
HDD
RAM
Copy
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
ꢁFrom an SD card or a video
equipment (from USB)
BD-RE BD-R -R -R DL
-RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Cannot copy
Copy AVCHD
Copy AVCHD
Cannot copy
HD Video (AVCHD format)
ꢁFrom discs
HDD
High speed
High speed
HDD
BD-RE BD-R
HD Video (AVCHD format)
ꢁFrom an SD card or a video
equipment (from USB)
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
ꢃAlmost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been treated so, cannot be recorded using this unit.
RQT9428
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Copy speed
(ꢂ: Possible, –: Impossible)
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Features
Copy with shorter time than the recorded time of the
title with same quality (recording mode).
It will take same or longer time as the recorded time
of the titles to be copied.
ꢁEven if you select a recording mode with better
picture quality than the original, the picture quality
does not improve.
Are chapters maintained?
ꢂꢃ1
ꢂ
ꢂꢃ1
ꢂꢃ2
Are thumbnails
maintained?
Recording and Playing
while Copying
ꢂꢃ3
–
ꢃ1 Position of the chapter might shift slightly.
It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers on a disc.
BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
–
–
: Approx. 1000
+R +R DL +RW
: Approx. 100
(Depends on the state of recording.)
ꢃ2 Position of the thumbnails might shift slightly. (May not be maintained depending on the state of recording.)
ꢃ3 Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with finalisation or when copying SD Video (MPEG2 format) or when copying HD Video (AVCHD
format).]
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–Still pictures or music cannot be played.
Copying speed when copying from the HDD to BD-R in High Speed Copy
Approx.
6X Speed BD-R
HDD
(DL, 50 GB/SL, 25 GB)
Required time
q
Recording Mode
Recorded programme
Speed
HL
1 hour
1 min. 24s.
43x
Note
ꢁThe above rate in the list indicates the shortest time and fastest speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to the disc by High-Speed
copying.
ꢁThe required amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area where information is written or unique feature
on the disc.
RQT9428
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
■ Frequently Asked Questions
When is the time high speed copy is not
possible?
It will copy at normal speed in following cases:
ꢁCopying XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode title to the BD-RE or BD-R
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
ꢁCopying to
in following conditions:
–Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode
–Title of the AVCHD copied to the HDD
ꢁCopying to
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
in following conditions:
–Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“Off”
–Titles that contain many deleted segments.
–Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic digital video
camera with HDD (SD Video) (➡ 61).
+R +R DL +RW
–
Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
mode.
+R +R DL +RW
–
–
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5
-R -R DL -RW(V)
hours or longer) mode
ꢁSetting “Recording Mode” to anything but “High Speed” in “Copy”
ꢁCopying from BD-RE, BD-R, +RW to HDD
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
ꢁ
When copying from the finalised disc to HDD
When copying titles in high speed mode
to high speed recording compatible discs
The sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “BD/DVD Speed for High
Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 90).
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
When copying to disc in normal speed
mode
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the
HDD and then copied at high speed to the disc. The titles that were temporarily copied to the
HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new blank disc, if
you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to
the disc is greater than 499 in total.
When stopping the copy during copy
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only recording” restriction, only
titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
ꢁ
If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily
copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the
step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point
cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card, ꢁIt can be copied to the disc.
BD-RE BD-R
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
or USB memory after copying HD video
(AVCHD format) to the HDD?
–
–
It can be copied with HD quality.
It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be
copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
ꢁIt cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
RQT9428
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Speed and recording mode when copying
Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE or HL mode
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc.
ꢁIt will start copying from the beginning of the title regardless of the
playing position.
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
High speedꢃ1
Same as title to be
copiedꢃ1
BD-RE BD-R
HDD
BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
p
1 Playback the title to copy.
RAM
-R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
Normal speed
FR
ꢃ1 When copying over the available space on the disc, one from HG,
HX, HE or HL modes will be selected to match the available
space, and it will be copied with normal speed.
Titles in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode
When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio
and subtitles
Copy destination
Copy Speed
Recording mode
BD-RE BD-R
BD-RE BD-R
Normal speed
Recording mode of
playing back titleꢃ1
ꢁWhen copying at high speed, audio and subtitles can be
copied as is.
ꢁWhen copying at normal speed, only the audio selected in
“Audio Selection” in the Disc menu will be copied for the
multiple audio. (➡ 80)
Subtitle will not be copied.
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
ꢁOnly the audio selected in “Audio Selection” in the Disc
menu will be copied for the multiple audio. (➡ 80)
Subtitle will not be copied.
High speedꢃ1
Same as title to be
copiedꢃ1
RAM
High speedꢃ1 ꢃ2
Same as title to be
copiedꢃ1
-R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
ꢃ1 When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,
copy will perform at normal speed in FR mode.
ꢃ2 Titles that were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 90)
set to “Off” will be copied with normal speed. In the following
cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, copy will
perform at normal speed.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Title
e r
+R +R DL +RW
When the copying source was recorded in
“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
ꢁ
Playing” and press [OK].
ꢁWhen the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
ꢁWhen the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” do not match.
4 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
ꢁWhen the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
+R +R DL +RW
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
–
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R
and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after
copy (➡ 86). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you
create top menu (➡ 86).
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
ꢁStill pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
ꢁTo confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
Note
ꢁTimer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying)
RQT9428
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
You cannot start copying when the value of “Size” (➡ 55)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).
5 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Copying using the copying list—Copy
HDD
BD-RE BD-R RAM +RW
'
-RW(VR)
HDD
p
6 Set to make it possible to play on
HDD
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
p
You can order titles as desired for copy to disc.
other equipment.
(“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”)
1
While stopped
HDD
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
only)
(
p
Press [ ] if it is not to be set (➡ step 7)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
r
1 Press [
,
] to select “Other setting” and press [ ].
q
e r
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
e r
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [
,
] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
e r
press [OK].
ꢁIf “On” is selected
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
–
After finalising, the discs
Copy
become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or
edit.
Cancel All
Source
HDD
1 Copy Direction
HDD
BD / DVD
Destination
BD / DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
Information of the copy destination
+RW
Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
–
-
-
DVD-RAM
Copy restricted titles can be
3 Create List
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
0
copied on to disc
Start Copying
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
ꢁIf you are not going to change the registered list press [
several times (➡ step 7).
]
r
7 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
and press [OK].
3 Set the copy direction.
8 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
ꢁIf you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[
] (➡ step 4).
r
[OK] to start copying.
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Direction” and press [ ].
] to select “Source” and press [OK].
] to select the drive and press [OK].
e r
q
,
e r
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
,
e r
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“BD/DVD” or vice versa. (➡ Go to step 6)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
4 Press [
,
] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
e r
5 Press [
,
] to select the drive and press [OK].
e r
The same drive as the copy source cannot be copied.
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising or creating Top
Menu)
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
4 Set the recording mode.
ꢁIf you are not going to change the recording mode, press
ꢁStill pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
ꢁTo confirm the current progress
[
] (➡ step 5).
r
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
4 Press [
[OK].
5 Press [
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
,
] to select “Copy Mode” and press [ ].
e r
q
,
] to select “Format” and press [OK].
] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
] to select “Recording Mode” and press
e r
Press [STATUS ].
,
e r
Note
,
e r
ꢁTitles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
ꢁTimer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings. (Only when high speed
copying without finalising or creating Top Menu.)
,
] to select the mode and press [OK].
e r
5 Register titles for copy.
ꢁIf you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 6).
1 Press [
,
e r
] to select “Create List” and press [ ].
q
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343 MB
(
0% )
Size:
0 MB
Title
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
HDD
BD / DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
3 Create List
0
Start Copying
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
Create copy list.
OPTION
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Create List Grouped Titles
HDD
Date Channel Time
Title Name
Title
25.05
01.01 AV2
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
12:36
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Time
12:36
Rec time
0:52(SP)
61 MB
Size
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OPTION
RETURN
3 Press [
,
] to select the title and press [ ].
e r
h
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
ꢁWhen copying to a disc using high speed mode, only titles
indicated with “
ꢁTo show other pages
Press [ ].
” can be registered.
,
u i
4 Press [OK].
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ 55)
RQT9428
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ To check the properties of a title and sort
Copying list icons and functions
Copying list
Copying list indicators
1 Press [ , ] to select the title and press
e r
Titles that can be copied in high speed mode to
the inserted disc
[OPTION].
Properties
Sort
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. [“One time only
recording” titles can only be transferred from the
HDD to a disc (HDD, BD-RE, BD-R or CPRM
(➡ 118) compatible DVD-RAM). They are deleted
from the HDD.]
Grouped Titles
2 Press [ , ] to select “Properties” or “Sort” and
e r
press [OK].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
Title contains still picture(s)
ꢁStill picture(s) cannot be copied.
Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on
the unit.
ꢁTitles displaying these marks cannot be
selected.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [
,
] to select the item and press [OK].
e r
This changes the way that titles are displayed.You can select to
display titles by No., Date, Day, Channel, Start time and Title name.
(You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.) If you close the
Copying list screen, the display order is cancelled.
Data size of each registered item
Size:
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
(
0% )
Size:
0 MB
■ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 5–4 (➡ 54)
1 Press [OPTION].
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
No. Size
Title
Delete All
New item (Total=0)
Add
ꢁWhen copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
ꢁThe total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select the operation and press
Delete
Move
[OK].
Page 01/01
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1
Press [ ] to select the title and press [ ].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
,
e r
h
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy
(➡ 86). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you create
top menu (➡ 86).
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
2
Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying
list.
Press [
,
e r
] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (➡ 54)
1
2
Press [
Press [
,
,
,
] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
e r w q
,
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁThe settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at
the copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
RQT9428
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
4
When the top menu is displayed
Press [ , , , ] to select the title
e r w q
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
DVD-V
HDD
p
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit. While
playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
ꢁWhen “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 90) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 89) in the Setup menu.
My favorite
01/02
01
02
Chapter
1
Chapter
2
03
04
Chapter
3
Chapter
4
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
ꢁOperations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
ꢁAlmost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Preparation
ꢁInsert the finalised disc (➡ 15).
To stop copying
Press [ ].
g
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
ꢁIf stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
After performing steps 1–4 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Video”) (➡ 54, Copying using the copying list—Copy)
Note
1 Set “Copy Time”.
ꢁThe screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
ꢁIf you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 2).
■ Setting the unit to copy according to the set
ꢁThe content is recorded as 1 title from the
start of copy to the end.
ꢁIf play does not begin automatically or if the
top menu does not display automatically,
time
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Time” and press [ ].
] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
e r
q
,
e r
press [ ](PLAY) to start.
q
ꢁSetting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [ ] to select “Off” and press [OK].
ꢁEven if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
ꢁIf you want to copy a title from a DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording
format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 54, Copying using the
copying list—Copy).
,
e r
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
ꢁSetting the copying time
3 Press [
,
] to select “On” and press [OK].
] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
e r
4 Press [ ,
e r
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
BD / DVD
HDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video SP
Set the time
a
few minutes longer.
3 Copy Time
2:00
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
Press OK to change the setting.
5 Press [
,
] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [
,
e r
]
w q
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
ꢁSet a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
ꢁDisc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➡ 86).
RQT9428
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording broadcasts from external equipment
HDD
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 28)
e.g., Connecting to the AV2 terminals on the front
ꢁTurn off the unit and external equipment before connecting.
AV2 IN
This unit
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R
S VIDEO
S Video
cableꢃ
Audio/Video
cable
External equipment
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
ꢃ
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 92).
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select
“AV2”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
ꢁDR, HG, HX, HE, HL, FR mode cannot be selected.
3 Select the channel on the other
equipment.
4 Press [ REC].
*
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [ ] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
h
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
RQT9428
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video cassette recorder
e.g., Connecting to the AV2 or DV input terminals on the front
Manual recording
HDD
ꢁTurn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
ꢁWhen recording bilingual programmes, select “M 1” or “M 2” on the
external equipment.
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 92).
This unit
AV2 IN
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R
DV IN
S VIDEO
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select
“AV2”.
S Video
cableꢃ
Audio/Video
cable
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
Other video equipment
recording mode.
ꢁDR, HG, HX, HE, HL, FR mode cannot be selected.
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
3 Start play on the other equipment.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV2 input terminals at the front.
ꢃ
4
When you want to start recording
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
Press [ REC].
*
Recording starts.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
ꢁUse only DV cable with ferrite core.
ꢁSelect the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (➡ 91).
ꢁWhen recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
ꢁWhen “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 90) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 89) in the Setup menu.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [ ] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
h
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
Using Flexible Recording (➡ 32)
Almost all videos and BD-Video/DVD-Video on sale have
been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that
has been treated so, cannot be recorded using this unit.
Recording of 16:9 image such as wide broadcasting (➡ 28)
Note
ꢁIf video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit,
then the video quality will be degraded.
ꢁWhile copying from DV input or executing “Recording via AV2
input” (➡ 59)
–Copy will stop when timer recording starts.
–Chasing playback, simultaneous rec and play, switching of the
broadcast or input cannot be performed.
RQT9428
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DV Automatic Recording
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Preparation
Recording via AV2 input
BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
It is possible to record to disc from equipment connected to the AV2
input terminals.
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ 58).
Turn on the main unit.
Recording mode is FR mode (➡ 30).
2
Preparation
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 92).
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. Select “BD” for DVD.
ꢁWhen the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 92).
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording
1
While stopped
to start.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
The following screen appears.
DV Automatic Recording
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
press [OK].
Record from the DV unit?
Rec to HDD
3 Press [ , ] to select “Recording via
e r
Rec to Blu-ray Disc/DVD
AV2 input” and press [OK].
OK
RETURN
ꢁIt may take a while for the next screen to display while
preparing to record.
ꢁWhen the screen is not displayed
Recording via AV2 input
Please set recording time.
Maximum recording time
After performing step 1
Record in FR mode.
1
2
3
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
7 hour 53 min.
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Others” and press [OK].
] to select “DV Automatic Recording” and
e r
Set recording time
,
e r
8
00
Hour
Min.
OK
Start Cancel
press [OK].
➡ Go to step 2
Recording will stop when
timer recording starts.
RETURN
4 Press [ , ] to select “Hour” and
w q
2 Press [ , ] to select “Rec to HDD” or
e r
“Min.” and press [ , ] to set the
“Rec to Blu-ray Disc/DVD” and press
[OK].
e r
recording time.
ꢁYou can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
ꢁIt may take a while for the next screen to display while
preparing to record.
5 Start play on the other equipment.
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
6
When you want to start recording
ꢁDR, HG, HX, HE, HL, FR mode cannot be selected.
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
4 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN ].
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [ ].
g
To stop recording partway
Press [ ].
g
Note
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
ꢁOnly one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)
can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
ꢁIt is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
ꢁThe DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
ꢁThe DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
ꢁDepending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
Note
-R
ꢁ
It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times of
step 3 or recording or editing.
-R -RW(V)
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
created.
+R
ꢁ
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
+RW
After creating top menu, chapters for every 8 minutes will be
created.
ꢁThe date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment
will not be recorded.
-R
ꢁ
It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times of
step 2 or recording or editing.
-R -RW(V)
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 5 minutes will be
created.
+R
ꢁ
ꢁ
After finalising, chapters for every 8 minutes will be created.
+RW
After creating top menu, chapters for every 8 minutes will be
created.
If the DV Automatic Recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ 58).
RQT9428
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video (MPEG2 format)
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
It is possible to copy the HD video (AVCHD format) recorded on the Panasonic Video Camera to the HDD or disc.
■ From an SD card or Discs
■ From a video equipment
AVCHD
AVCHD
HDD
(Disc) p
(SD card) p
HDD BD-RE BD-R
Camera’s HDD p
HDD BD-RE BD-R
ꢁYou cannot playback HD Video in the camera’s HDD with this
unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or disc.
HDD
HDD
HDD
BD-RE BD-R
BD-RE BD-R
1 Insert a disc or card.
SD
e.g.,
SD Card
Preparation
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
1 Connect the camera to this unit.
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
2 Select the appropriate mode that
makes the camera ready for data
transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in
each media.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
the camera.
ꢁRefer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
(AVCHD)” and press [OK].
e.g.,
3
When copying from an SD card
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Press [ , ] to select “Copy to HDD”
e r
or “Copy to Blu-ray Disc” and press
[OK].
USB device is inserted.
OK
4 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
RETURN
press [ ].
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in
h
each media.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary titles.
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
(AVCHD)” and press [OK].
5 Press [OK].
4 Press [ , ] to select “Copy to HDD”
e r
or “Copy to Blu-ray Disc” and press
[OK].
6 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
It will automatically format the unformatted disc, such as new
disc, when copying.
5 Press [ , ] to select the title and
e r
press [ ].
h
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary titles.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
It will automatically format the unformatted disc, such as new
disc, when copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Note
ꢁRecord, playback or timer recording cannot be executed while copying.
ꢁCopy cannot be executed while recording or playback.
ꢁAn AVCHD title with more than 100 scenes will be divided into titles every 99th scene and copied.
ꢁCopied video will be displayed as “AVCHD” in the “Channel” column of the Direct Navigator screen.
ꢁDepending on the recording condition with the high definition camera, scenes recorded on same day might have different titles (“-1”, “-2”
appended to date).
ꢁSee the instructions of the equipment used to record.
RQT9428
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format)
It is possible to copy the SD video (MPEG2 format) recorded on the Panasonic Video Camera to the HDD or disc.
■ From an SD card
■ From a video equipment
SD
HDD RAM
HDD RAM
Camera’s HDD p
p
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
DVD-RAM
1 Insert a card.
e.g.,
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
USB connection cable
(specified cable such as accessory
of the USB equipment)
SD card is inserted.
OK
Preparation
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
RETURN
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in
each media.
1 Connect the camera to this unit.
2 Select the appropriate mode that
makes the camera ready for data
transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
(MPEG2)” and press [OK].
3 Go to step 7 on page 54.
How to copy
the camera.
ꢁRefer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (➡ 54).
Please set the items in step 3 and 4 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source : SD CARD
e.g.,
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Mode:
Format : VIDEO
ꢁSD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copy list.
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in
each media.
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Video
e r
(MPEG2)” and press [OK].
4 Go to step 7 on page 54.
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Copy” (➡ 54).
Please set the items in step 3 and 4 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source : USB
Copy Mode:
Format : VIDEO
ꢁSD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the
copy list.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Note
ꢁYou cannot playback SD Video on an SD card or in the camera’s HDD with this unit.You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
ꢁYou cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
RQT9428
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing still pictures
HDD BD-RE RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ꢁYou can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW, USB memory and SD card.
ꢁYou cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
HDD BD-RE RAM
ꢁWhen “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button
to select “PICTURE”.
ꢁTo switch the display method
Still pictures copied from SD cards and USB memories are
grouped by the shooting date.
Preparation
ꢁInsert a disc, USB memory or SD card.
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Select “BD” for DVD or CD.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album
(➡ 64).
1 Press [OPTION].
The display below automatically appears when you insert an SD
card, USB memory or the discs while stopped.
2 Press [
,
] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
e r
Press [
,
] to select “Play Pictures (JPEG)” and press [OK].
e r
and press [OK].
Then go to step 2 (➡ right).
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pictures by Date
Time Remaining
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
It will go to step 2 (➡ right) automatically if it is
only still pictures that is recorded.
Pictures by Date screen
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
001
002
Date:08.09.2006
Total 19
Date:04.02.2007
Total
Disc
e.g.,
9
CD
CD
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
Play Video ( DivX )
OPTION
h
Select
OK
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
q
Slideshow
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
RETURN
Play/Copy Music ( MP3 )
Select file type.
OK
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and Album protected.
RETURN
USB
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
HDD BD-RE RAM
Date that has not yet been viewed
(Only still pictures copied with “Copy All Pictures” or
“Copy New Pictures”)
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
To show other pages
Press [ ].
SD
,
u i
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the album
e r w q
or date and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
e.g.,
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
SD card is inserted.
04.02.2009
OK
RETURN
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
If the menu screen (➡ above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
-R -R DL CD USB SD
Page 001/001
OK
OPTION
Select
h
q
Slideshow
RETURN
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [ , , , ] to select the still
e r w q
-R -R DL CD SD
picture and press [OK].
Press [
,
e r
] to select “Playback” and press [OK].
USB
ꢁPress [
,
] to display the previous or next still picture.
w q
ꢁUseful functions during still picture play (➡ 63)
1 Press [
, ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
To return to previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9428
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start
Slideshow
1 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select the album or date.
e r w q
2 Press [ ] (PLAY).
q
You can also start Slideshow with following steps.
After performing step 1 (➡ above)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ ] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].
,
e r
To end the slideshow
Press [RETURN ].
1 Press [ ,
2 Press [OPTION].
,
,
] to select the album or date.
Slideshow
Settings
e r w q
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
3 Press [ , ] to select “Slideshow Settings” and press [OK].
e r
ꢁTo change the display interval
After performing steps 1–3
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Display interval”.
] to select the desired interval.
e r
,
e r
,
e r w q
,
,
] to select “Set”.
ꢁTo change the transition effect
After performing steps 1–3
1 Press [
2 Press [
“Fade”
,
] to select “Transition Effect”.
] to select the transition effect.
: Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in.
e r
,
w q
“Motion” : Pictures are changed by fading out and fading in, while it is enlarged,
reduced, or moved up or down.
“Random” : In addition to the “Motion”, pictures are changed by various methods.
3 Press [ ] to select “Set”.
,
,
,
e r w q
ꢁTo set repeat play
After performing steps 1–3
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Repeat Play”.
] to select “On” or “Off”.
e r
,
w q
,
e r w q
,
,
] to select “Set”.
ꢁTo playback the music
Sample music in this unit or music stored on the HDD (My Favourites or Playlist) (➡ 73) can be played during the
playback of the slideshow.
After performing steps 1–3
Select Soundtrack
Please select music playlist for soundtrack.
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Soundtrack”.
] to select “On”.
e r
,
w q
Sample Soundtrack
My Favourites
, ,
e r w q
,
] to select “Set”.
01
02
03
ꢁTo change the music to playback
After performing steps 1–3
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].
] to select the music playlist and press [OK].
e r
OK
RETURN
,
e r
, ,
e r w q
,
] to select “Set”.
While playing
Rotate
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
e r
ꢁRotation information will not be stored in the following cases.
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
-R -R DL CD USB
–
Still pictures
OK
–When disc or card is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
RETURN
–When changing date
ꢁIf you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation information may not
be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
2 Press [ , ] to select “Zoom out” and press [OK].
e r
e r
Rotate LEFT
ꢁPress [
,
] to select “Zoom in” in step 2 and press [OK] to resume the display size of the still
Zoom out
picture.
OK
RETURN
ꢁWhen zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
ꢁThe Zoom out information will not be stored.
ꢁThis function is only available for small-sized still pictures.
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
Properties
1 Press [ ,
e r w q
3 Press [OPTION].
,
,
] to select the album or date and press [OK].
] to select the still picture.
e r w q
2 Press [ ,
,
,
4 Press [ , ] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
e r
While playing
HDD
e.g.,
2:00 01:01:2009.
g Remain HDD 30:30 DR
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Press [STATUS ] twice.
Date 1.1.2009
No.
3 / 9
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
Shooting date
RQT9428
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
3 Press [ , ] to select the operation
e r
HDD BD-RE RAM SD
and press [OK]
ꢁEditing can be done in units of pictures, albums, or dates.
ꢁYou cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-
R/CD-RW and USB memory.
HDD
(e.g.,
Pictures by Date)
Album View
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 63)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. Select “BD” for DVD.
Copy
Copy to Album
Copy to New Album
Copy to Disc
BD-RE RAM SD
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 11, 84, Setting the
protection).
Change Date
Delete
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
VIDEO / MUSIC
HDD BD-RE RAM
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
Still pictures operation (➡ 65)
HDD BD-RE RAM
HDD
(e.g.,
Album View)
To switch the display method
1 Press [OPTION].
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 63)
Pictures by Date
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
2 Press [
,
] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
e r
and press [OK].
Copy to Album
Copy to New Album
Copy to Disc
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pictures by Date
Time Remaining
Pictures by Date screen
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
001
002
Copy Album
Edit Album
Date:08.09.2006
Total 19
Date:04.02.2007
Total
9
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Delete Album
Press OK to display pictures.
VIDEO / MUSIC
Page 01/01
OPTION
h
Select
OK
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
q
Slideshow
RETURN
Still pictures operation (➡ 65)
2
Editing an album or date:
Select the album or date to be edited
HDD
(e.g.,
Picture (JPEG) View)
and press [OPTION].
Editing a still picture:
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 63)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
1 Select the album or date which contains
the still picture to edit and press [OK].
Properties
HDD
e.g.,
Copy Pictures
Copy to Album
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
Copy to New Album
Edit Pictures
04.02.2009
Delete Pictures
Change Date
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Pictures by Date
Page 001/001
OK
OPTION
Select
h
q
Slideshow
RETURN
Still pictures operation (➡ 65)
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
To show other pages
SD
(e.g.,
Album View)
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 63)
Press [
,
].
u i
Multiple editing
Select with [
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
,
,
,
] and press [ ]. (Repeat.)
e r w q
h
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
A check mark appears. Press [ ] again to cancel.
h
Edit Album
Delete Album
Still pictures operation (➡ 65)
SD
(e.g.,
Picture (JPEG) View)
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 63)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Properties
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Edit Pictures
Delete Pictures
Album View
Still pictures operation (➡ 65)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9428
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures operation
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 64)
Copy to Albumꢃ
Copy the selected album, date or pictures to an existing album.
1 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
HDD BD-RE RAM
2 Press [ ,
,
,
e r w q
] to select the destination album and press [OK].
ꢁThe destination album with protect setting cannot be copied to.
Copy to New Albumꢃ
Copy the selected album, date or pictures to new album.
1 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
HDD BD-RE RAM
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁIf “Yes” is selected:
You can give a name to the album. (➡ 76, Entering text)
ꢁIf “No” is selected:
Date of the first recorded picture in the album becomes the album name automatically. (If
there is no information about the recording date, it will become “--.--.----”.)
Press [ , ] to select “Start” and press [OK].
w q
Copy to Disc
HDD
Copy to HDD
BD-RE RAM
Change Dateꢃ
HDD BD-RE RAM
(Pictures by Date only)
Change the date of a folder and move the picture in it into the folder of the changed date.
1 Press [ , ] to select the item and press [ , ] to change.
w q
e r
2 Press [OK].
ꢁDate folder of the original is maintained. Delete it if unrequired.
ꢁIf there is no folder with the changed date, a new folder will be created.
You can give a name to the album.
(➡ 76, Entering text)
ꢁAlbum names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
Enter Album Name
HDD BD-RE RAM SD
(Album View only)
Set up Protectionꢃ
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
Cancel Protectionꢃ
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
ꢁEven if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album may be
deleted by another unit.
HDD BD-RE RAM SD
(Album View and Picture (JPEG) View only)
Deleteꢃ
Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
Delete Albumꢃ
proceeding.
Delete Picturesꢃ
BD-RE RAM SD
ꢁ
If there is a file other than DCF format or other folder exists in the date or
album, only the pictures will be deleted, and the date or the album itself will not be deleted.
HDD BD-RE RAM SD
ꢃ
Multiple editing is possible.
[Copy to Album, Copy to New Album, Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]
Note
ꢁTimer recordings do not start when performing “Copy to Album”, “Copy to New Album”, “Change Date”, “Copy to Disc” or “Copy to HDD”.
RQT9428
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
HDD BD-RE RAM USB SD
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Pictures
e r
ꢁPictures copied from SD card and USB memory will be
categorised according to the shooting date. Pictures without
shooting date will be categorised using the creation date.
ꢁYou cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/
CD-RW or USB memory.
ꢁIf the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 115), copying
will stop partway through.
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy from
Copy to
SD CARD
HDD
Copy added pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
Copy Cancel
ꢁYou cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
ꢁTimer recording will not start while copying still pictures.
OK
RETURN
Copying all the still pictures on the
USB memory—Copy All Pictures
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
w q
USB
HDD
p
press [OK].
ꢁProtection of the card is
–Set: Copy will start
1
While stopped
–Not set: Go to step 4
Insert the USB memory.
The menu is automatically displayed.
4 Press [ , ] to select “Copy & Delete”
w q
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
or “Copy Only” and press [OK].
If “Copy & Delete” is selected
Copied pictures in the SD card will be deleted after copying.
If “Copy Only” is selected
USB device is inserted.
Pictures will not be deleted.
OK
RETURN
ꢁ
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Direct Navigator for the added pictures.
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in
each media.
To stop copying
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy Pictures
e r
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
Note
ꢁThis unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and
30 SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy from
Copy to
USB
HDD
Copying using the copying list
Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
Copy Cancel
HDD
SD
BD-RE RAM SD
'
BD-RE RAM
'
OK
RETURN
USB
HDD BD-RE RAM
p
1
While stopped
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
w q
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
press [OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
e r
ꢁ
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Direct Navigator for the added pictures.
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
HDD
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD
HDD
Note
Destination
ꢁThe structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
at the copy destination.
3 Create List
0
Start Copying
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
ꢁIf you are not going to change the registered list press [
several times (➡ step 6).
]
r
SD
HDD
p
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new
still pictures will be imported.
3 Set the copy direction.
ꢁIf you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[
] (➡ step 4).
r
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
4 Press [
5 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Direction” and press [ ].
e r
,
q
1
While stopped
] to select “Source” and press [OK].
] to select the drive and press [OK].
] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
] to select the drive and press [OK].
e r
Insert the SD card.
,
e r
The menu is automatically displayed.
,
e r
,
SD Card
Play Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
e r
The same drive as the copy source cannot be copied.
6 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
4 Set the copy mode.
SD card is inserted.
ꢁIf you are not going to change the recording mode, press
OK
RETURN
[
] (➡ step 5).
r
1 Press [
2 Press [
3 Press [
,
] to select “Copy Mode” and press [ ].
] to select “Format” and press [OK].
] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
e r
,
q
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in
each media.
e r
,
e r
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
RQT9428
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 5–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [OPTION].
5 Register still pictures for copy.
ꢁIf you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 6).
2 Press [
,
] to select the operation and press
e r
Delete All
Add
ꢁPictures from different dates or albums will not be registered
to same list.
[OK].
Delete
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
1 Copy Direction
By Picture
(
Date
)
New Item
No.
HDD
BD / DVD
Size
Title
Add:
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
Add new items to the copying list.
3 Create List
1
Press [ ] to select the item and press [ ].
,
,
,
e r w q
h
0
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
Page 01/01
Start Copying
OK
Create copy list.
OPTION
RETURN
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
h
■Select the units to register
e r
2
1 Press [
,
] to select “Create List” and press [ ].
q
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “New Item” and press [OK].
Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
By Picture ( Date )
New Item
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
No
Size
Title
After performing steps 1–2 (➡ 66, Copying using the copying list)
3 Press [
,
e r
] to select the item and press [OK].
1
2
Press [
Press [
,
,
,
] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
e r w q
HDD
SD
e.g.,
e.g.,
,
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
ꢁThe settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
By Picture ( Date )
By Picture ( Album )
By Date Folder
By Album
Picture
Album
■ To select another folder
After performing step 5–2 [➡ left, Register with “By Picture (Date/
Album)”/“Picture”]
Register with “By Picture (Date/Album)”/“Picture”
1 Press [OPTION].
1 Press [
,
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [OK].
2 Press [
,
,
,
] to select the still picture and press
e r w q
3 Press [
,
,
,
] to select the folder and press [OK].
e r w q
[
]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until
h
ꢁThe still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
you select all necessary items.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
ꢁPress [
same list.
h
u i
,
] to show other pages.
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
ꢁTo select another folder (➡ right)
3 Press [OK].
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ right)
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
Register with “By Date Folder”/“By Album”/“Album”
1 Press [
,
] to select “New item” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [
,
,
,
] to select the folder and press [ ].
e r w q
h
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
ꢁPress [ ] again to cancel.
h
u i
ꢁPress [
,
] to show other pages.
ꢁThe items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item
at a time.
3 Press [OK].
ꢁTo edit the copying list (➡ right)
4 Press [ ] to confirm.
w
6 Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”
e r
and press [OK].
HDD
ꢁ[Only when copied with “By Picture (Album)” from
BD-RE RAM SD
BD-RE RAM
HDD SD
to
to
or from
]
When specifying another album as the copying
destination, select “Album”.
Album
New album
7 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
ꢁThe sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
ꢁIf still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
RQT9428
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting still pictures
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
HDD BD-RE RAM SD
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
e r
press [OK].
HDD BD-RE RAM
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
HDD BD-RE RAM
To switch the display method
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [
,
] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
e r
and press [OK].
DELETE Navigator
001
Pictures by Date
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
002
Date:08.09.2006
Total 19
Date:04.02.2007
Total
9
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
OPTION
h
Select
OK
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
RETURN
3
Deleting an album/date (still picture)
Press [ , , , ] to select the item
e r w q
and press [DEL].
Deleting a still picture
1 Press [ , ] to select the item which
,
,
e r w q
contains the still picture to delete and
press [OK].
2 Press [ ,
,
,
] to select the still picture
e r w q
and press [OK].
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
option menu. (➡ 64, step 2)
To show other pages
Press [
,
].
u i
Multiple deleting
Select with [
,
,
,
] and press [ ]. (Repeat.)
e r w q
h
A check mark appears. Press [ ] again to cancel.
h
4 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
press [OK].
The item is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9428
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Playing MP3 files
Playing music CD
-R -R DL CD USB
Insert a music CD.
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
ꢁYou cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording.
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (➡ 74) and
searches for the title information.
P O W E R E D B Y
1 Insert a disc or USB memory.
CD
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play/Copy Music ( MP3 )
Select file type.
OK
USB device is inserted.
RETURN
OK
RETURN
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in each
Press [
,
e r
] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
media.
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
Playback will automatically start if only MP3 is
ꢁPlayback will automatically start.
recorded.
0.09
4.30
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD
Music List
March Moon
Do this flower open?
2 Press [ , ] to select “Play/Copy
e r
No.
Track Name
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Playing track
01
02
03
04
05
Music (MP3)” and press [OK].
ꢁPlayback will automatically start.
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
CD
e.g.,
0.09
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD ( MP3 )
Music List
March Moon
Folder: Mexican pops
Track Name
OK
RETURN
Slideshow
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
No.
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
0001 March Moon
Playing track
Do this flower open?
0002
0003
0004
0005
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Playing different track
Press [ ] to select the track and press [OK].
,
e r
Reacquire the CD title
Press the “Yellow” button.
OPTION
Slideshow
OK
RETURN
Copy All
to HDD
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback of track will stop.
Playing different track
Press [ ] to select the track and press [OK].
,
e r
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Note
When this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when “Screen
Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 91)]. To return to the
previous screen, press [RETURN ].
Playback of track will stop.
If the menu screen (➡ above) is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
-R -R DL CD USB
1
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
-R -R DL CD
Press [
,
e r
] to select “Playback” and press [OK].
USB
1 Press [
, ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [
,
e r
] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
Using the tree screen to find a folder
-R -R DL CD USB
1 While the Music list is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [OK].
Selected folder No. /Total folders
If the folder has no track, “– –” is displayed as folder number.
0.09
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Select Folder
March Moon
CD ( MP3 )
MP3 music
001 My favorite
F
7/27
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
OK
RETURN
002 Standard number
3 Press [ , ] to select a folder and press
,
,
e r w q
[OK].
The Music list for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
When this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when “Screen
Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 91)]. To return to the
previous screen, press [RETURN ].
RQT9428
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Playing music recorded on HDD
3 Press [ , ] to select the track and
e r
Copying music to HDD (➡ 74)
press [OK].
0.09
4.30
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music List
March Moon
Do this flower open?
No.
Track Name
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Playing track
0001 March Moon
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
0002
0003
0004
0005
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button
to select “MUSIC”.
If eastern wind has gone
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
OPTION
Slideshow
OK
RETURN
Add to My
Favourites
Artists
Playing different track
Albums
Press [
,
e r
] to select the track and press [OK].
My Favourites
Playlists
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Frequently Played
Random Play
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].Playback of track will stop.
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
Note
2 Press [ , ] to select the item and
e r
ꢁYou cannot play music tracks on HDD while copying.
ꢁWhen this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when “Screen
Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 91)]. To return to the
previous screen, press [RETURN ].
press [OK].
Artists
1
2
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
3
4
5
Frequently Played
Random Play
6
1 Categorise by artist
2 Categorise by album
3 Tracks registered in “My Favourites”
4 Tracks registered in “Playlists”
5 Tracks played most within 200 tracks played recently
(up to 30 Tracks)
6 Random playback of all tracks
■When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [
2 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select the initial of the artist.
] to select the name of the artist, and press
w q
,
e r
3 Press [
,
e r
] to select the album.
■When “Albums” is selected
w q
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select the initial of the album.
] to select the album.
,
e r
RQT9428
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during music play
HDD -R -R DL CD USB
Operations during play
Press [ ].
g
Stop
Pause
Press [ ].
h
Press [ ] again or [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
h
q
Press [
] or [
].
y
t
Search
Skip
Press [ ](PLAY) to restart play.
q
During play or while paused,
press [
] or [
].
u
i
Skip to the track you want to play.
ꢁEach press increases the number of skips.
While Music list screen is displayed
Register a track to
Press [ ] to select the track and press the “Green” button.
,
e r
“My Favourites”
ꢁUp to 99 tracks can be registered.
HDD
While Music list screen is displayed
Properties
1
Press [OPTION].
HDD
2
Press [
,
] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
e r
ꢁTo exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Repeat Play
Random
Press [
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Play” and press [ ].
e r
q
,
] to select “Repeat Play” or “Random” and press [ ].
] to select the item.
e r
q
,
e r
ꢁRepeat Play
“All”: Repeatedly playback the selected album, etc.
“Track”: Repeatedly playback the selected track
“Off”
ꢁRandom
“On”: Randomly playback the selected album, etc.
“Off”
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher frequency signals not recorded on the track.
Re-master
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Press [
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Sound” and press [ ].
e r
q
,
] to select “Sound Effects” and press [ ].
] to select “Re-master1” or “Re-master2”.
e r
q
,
e r
ꢁ“V.Surround1” or “V.Surround2” is displayed, but there is no effect even if it is set.
ꢁThis function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when
“Digital Audio Output” is set to “PCM”. (However, in this case, audio is output as 2ch from the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT terminal.)
Sample pictures in this unit or pictures stored on “Album View” of the HDD can be played back as slideshow during
playback of the music.
Display Still
Pictures
(Slideshow)
While playing the music
Press the “Red” button.
Select Picture Album
Change the pictures to display
Please select the album to start slideshow.
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].
Sample Pictures
My Favourites
My Travel
Press [
Press [
,
] to select “Select Picture Album” and press [OK].
] to select the album and press [OK].
e r
,
e r
While playing music a picture slideshow
can be displayed.
OK
RETURN
To end the slideshow
Press [RETURN ].
ꢁIt will also end when the music is stopped.
When the unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) that supports HDAVI Control 2 or later and the unit is
turned off if the power to the television is turned off, since “Power off link” (➡ 78) operates.
The following operations make it possible to keep the power of the unit ON and to play music continuously.
Playing music
continuously
even after turning
off power to the
television
1 While playing music
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [ ] to select “TV Power Off” and press [OK].
,
e r
ꢁSound may be discontinued for several seconds when the power to the television is turned off.
ꢁIf the operation mentioned above is executed while audio is output from the television, the sound may not be
output from the amplifier/receiver. It is recommended to set the amplifier/receiver beforehand so that audio will be
output from the amplifier/receiver.
RQT9428
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing music/playlist
Editing music
HDD
Album and track operation
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ left)
Delete all tracks in the HDD.
Preparation
Delete All Tracks
ꢁWhile displaying Music
Menu screen
1 Press [
,
] to select “Yes” and
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
w q
press [OK].
2 Press [
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
,
] to select “Delete”
w q
and press [OK].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button
to select “MUSIC”.
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
ꢁWhen doing “Delete All Tracks”, “Clear My Favourites” or
“Clear Frequently Played” (➡ go to step 3)
All tracks in the selected Artist or
Album are deleted in case of “Delete
All Tracks” or “Delete Album”.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
Delete All Tracks
ꢁWhile displaying “Artists”
screen
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Artists
Press [ ] to select “Delete” and
,
w q
Albums
Delete Album
ꢁWhile displaying
“Albums” screen
press [OK].
My Favourites
Playlists
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Frequently Played
Random Play
Delete
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
(➡ 76, Entering text)
RETURN
Edit Album Name
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Clear My
2 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
[OK].
Remove all tracks in “My Favourites”.
Tracks themselves are not deleted
from the HDD.
■When “Artists” is selected
Favourites
1 Press [
2 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select the initial of the artist.
] to select the name of the artist, and press
w q
Press [ ] to select “Clear” and
,
w q
,
e r
press [OK].
3 Press [
,
] to select the album.
Remove all tracks in “Frequently
Played”. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
e r
Clear Frequently
Played
ꢁTo edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
].
[
,
e r
Press [ ] to select “Clear” and
,
w q
press [OK].
■When “Albums” is selected
w q
1 Press [
,
] to select the initial of the album.
] to select the album.
2 Press [
,
e r
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Remove
ꢁTo edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
].
ꢁWhile displaying “My
Favourites” or
[
,
e r
Press [
,
] to select “Remove”
w q
and press [OK].
“Frequently Played”
screen
3 Press [OPTION].
4 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
[OK].
e.g., while selecting album
Delete Album
(➡ 73)
Album and track operation (➡ right)
Add to Playlist
Edit Album Name
e.g., while selecting artist
Delete All Tracks
Edit Artist Name
Album and track operation (➡ right)
e.g., while selecting track
Delete
(➡ 73)
Add to Playlist
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Properties
Album and track operation (➡ right)
(➡ 71)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9428
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Register track to Playlist
HDD
Editing Playlist
HDD
You can register your favourite albums and tracks into 10 preset
playlists.
ꢁName of the playlist can be changed.
ꢁNew playlist cannot be added.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
ꢁUp to 999 tracks can be registered to each playlist.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Playlists” and
e r
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
press [OK].
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
3
Edit the playlist
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button
to select “MUSIC”.
Press [ , ] to select the playlist and
e r
press [OPTION].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Edit the track in the playlist
Artists
1 Press [ , ] to select the playlist and press
e r
Albums
[OK].
My Favourites
Playlists
2 Press [ , ] to select the track and press
e r
[OPTION].
Frequently Played
Random Play
4 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
[OK].
e.g., while selecting playlist
2 Press [ , ] to select item and press
e r
Remove All Tracks
[OK].
(➡ below)
Edit Playlist Name
■When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [
2 Press [
[OK].
,
] to select the initial of the artist.
w q
,
e r
] to select the name of the artist, and press
e.g., while selecting the track in playlist
3 Press [
,
] to select the album.
ꢁTo register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
e r
(➡ below)
Remove
[
,
e r
].
(➡ left)
Add to Playlist
■When “Albums” is selected
w q
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Properties
(➡ 72)
1 Press [
,
] to select the initial of the album.
] to select the album.
2 Press [
,
e r
ꢁTo register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
(➡ 71)
[
,
e r
].
3 Press [OPTION].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
4 Press [ , ] to select “Add to
e r
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playlist” and press [OK].
5 Press [ , ] to select the playlist to
e r
Playlist operation
register, and press [OK].
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ above, Editing Playlist)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Playlists
Remove all tracks in the selected
playlist. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Remove All Tracks
Playlist Name
My Favourites
Playlist 01
Playlist 02
Playlist 03
Playlist 04
Playlist 05
Playlist 06
Playlist 07
Press [
and press [OK].
,
] to select “Remove”
w q
Playlist 08
Playlist 09
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Remove
Please select playlist to add to.
OK
RETURN
Press [
,
] to select “Remove”
w q
and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
(➡ 76, Entering text)
Edit Playlist Name
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9428
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying music to HDD
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
1
While stopped
Music CD (CD-DA)
Insert a disc or USB memory.
When inserting music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
CD
(Music CD)
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
MP3
P O W E R E D B Y
You can copy MP3 files from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD or USB
memory.
The track name and artist name will be displayed on this unit if the
information is contained in ID3 tag of the MP3 file.
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and
retrieve music CD title information.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [
,
e r
] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
When a music CD is inserted, the unit will automatically search for
and obtain information about the inserted music CD.
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained. This unit has an internal
database containing information for approximately 350,000 album
titles.
If the title of the newly released music CD is not in the built-in
database, it is possible to acquire the title automatically by
connecting to the network via the Internet. (➡ 102)
-R -R DL CD
USB
(MP3)
The menu is automatically displayed.
Press [
[OK].
,
e r
] to select “Play/Copy Music (MP3)” and press
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
(MP3) It will go to step 2 automatically if it is
only MP3 that is recorded.
CD
USB
(MP3)
e.g.,
If there are music CDs with very similar title information, then the
incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions
are found, it is displayed as “Unknown Artist”, “Unknown Album”.
In these cases, enter the music CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
USB device
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
USB device is inserted.
OK
Copying music from a disc or a USB
memory
RETURN
CD
Play Video ( DivX )
-R -R DL CD USB
HDD
p
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
CD
ꢁ
ꢁ
(Music CD): All tracks in the CD will be recorded.
Play/Copy Music ( MP3 )
-R -R DL CD USB
(MP3) : All tracks in the folder will be recorded.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
Select file type.
OK
RETURN
ꢁIt will be recorded as 1 album to the HDD in 1 recording.
ꢁAudio quality
ꢁDisplay contents differ depending on what is recorded in
each media.
CD
(Music CD): LPCM,
-R -R DL CD USB
(MP3): MP3
ꢁThe maximum number of tracks on HDD: 40000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
2 Press the “Blue” button.
CD
e.g.,
(Music CD)
0.09
4.30
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD
Music List
March Moon
Do this flower open?
No.
Track Name
March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Playing track
01
02
03
04
05
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
OK
RETURN
Slideshow
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
3 Press [ , ] to select “Copy” and
w q
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
ꢁWhile recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
ꢁTracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB
memory or SD card.
ꢁCDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
RQT9428
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting music
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
HDD
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
e r
press [OK].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Artists
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
3
Deleting an artist/album (music)
1 Press [ , ] to select the item and press
e r
[OK].
2 Press [ ,
,
,
e r w q
] to select the item and
press [DEL].
Deleting a track
1 Press [ , ] to select the item and press
e r
[OK].
2 Press [ ,
,
e r w q
,
] to select the item and
press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select the track and press
e r
[OK].
Remove the music
(Only when “My Favourites”, “Playlists” or “Frequently
Played” are selected)
1 Press [ , ] to select the item and press
e r
[OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select the track and press
e r
[OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Remove” and press
w q
[OK].
ꢁRemove is executed. (There is no need to proceed to
step 4)
ꢁTrack itself is not deleted from the HDD.
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
option menu. (➡ 72, step 3)
4 Press [ , ] to select “Delete” and
w q
press [OK].
The item is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9428
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
2 Press [ , , , ] to select a
e r w q
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
character and press [OK].
The maximum number of characters:
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
ꢁTo delete a character
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM
Characters
64 (44ꢃ)
254 (44ꢃ)
HDD RAM
Title (
Title (
)
Press [
,
,
,
] to select the character in the name field
e r w q
BD-RE BD-R
)
and press [ ]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
h
ꢁUsing the numbered buttons to enter characters
HDD BD-RE RAM
Album of still pictures (
)
36
e.g., entering the letter “R”
HDD
Album (Music) (
)
59
5
6
J
M
P
T
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
3 Press [OK].
HDD
HDD
Track (
Artist (
)
)
59
7
7
39
7
HDD
Playlist (Music) (
)
59
7
8
BD-RE BD-R
Disc (
Disc (
)
254
64
RAM
)
ꢃTitle name for timer recording
3 Press [ ] (Set).
g
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Characters
Title
Disc
44
40
To end partway
Press [RETURN ].
Text is not added.
Note
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
Enter Title Name
Chapter 1_
1 Show Enter Name screen.
_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
+
/
9
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
Title (timer recording)
–
=
*
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 34.
%
i
#
$
&
Title
Select “Enter Title Name” in step 4 on page 46.
Disc
For your reference
Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 84.
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (➡ 86). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu
Preview” window.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 3, “Editing still pictures
(JPEG)” on page 64.
HDD
Album (Music) (
)
Select “Edit Album Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 72.
HDD
Track (
)
Select “Edit Track Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 72.
HDD
Artist (
)
Select “Edit Artist Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 72.
HDD
Playlist (Music) (
)
Select “Edit Playlist Name” in step 4 of “Editing Playlist” on
page 73.
-R
e.g., Entering a title name for a title on
.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Enter Title Name
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
+
/
9
–
=
$
0
Top Menu Preview
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
#
<
[
&
@
_
Delete
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
>
]
g
Set
m
n
o
M
P
T
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
^
`
0
OK
0
9
– –
SPACE
RETURN
RQT9428
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
Note
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home
screen with VIERA CAST, for example YouTube, Picasa Web
Albums. (Current as of February 2009)
ꢁVIERA CASTTM home screen is subject to change without notice.
ꢁThe services through VIERA CASTTM are operated by their respective
service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily
or permanently without notice.Therefore, Panasonic will make no
warranty for the content or the continuity of the services.
ꢁAll features of websites or content of the service may not be available.
ꢁSome content may be inappropriate for some viewers.
ꢁSome content may only be available for specific countries and may
be presented in specific languages.
ꢁDepending on the usage conditions, it may take a while to read all
the data.
ꢁThe connection to the Internet may take time or the Internet may
not be connected depending on the connection environment.
ꢁThe unit is connected to the Internet when VIERA CAST is used,
generating communication charges.
ꢁVIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up
Internet connections cannot be used.
Preparation
ꢁNetwork connection (➡ 102)
ꢁNetwork setting (➡ 96)
1 Press [VIERA CAST].
ꢁMessage is displayed. Please read these instructions
carefully and then press [OK] to start VIERA CAST function.
Welcome to Network Service
Your Panasonic Network Service allows you to access web-based content on your Player/Recorder.
Network Service is subject to change without notice. The Service through Network Service is operated by
their respective service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily or permanently
without notice. Therefore, Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the continuity of the
services. All features of websites or content of the service may not be available. Some content may be
inappropriate for some viewers and may only be available for specific countries and may be presented in
specific languages. You may disable the Network Service feature by following the instructions found in
your Operating Instructions.
ꢁIf timer recording starts, VIERA CAST will stop.
Don’t show this message again
ENTER
It's recommanded your player/recorder is connected to Full HD display with HDMI. The display of the
contents may be truncated, depending on your TV. You may reduce to screen size by following the
instructions found in your Operating Instructions.
Images are for illustration purpose, message may
change without notice.
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the item
e r w q
and press [OK].
ꢁ
You can operate VIERA CAST using the following buttons on
the unit’s remote control. [e, r, w, q], [OK], [RETURN ],
[OPTION], colored buttons and numbered buttons
ꢁTo access more features on YouTube or Picasa Web Albums
site, enter your user ID and password that you have
previously set up with these sites through the internet on
your PC. However, not all features may be accessible
through VIERA CAST.
VIERA CAST Home screen;
After you access YouTube or
Settings
Picasa Web Albums from the
VIERA CAST Home screen
and add your favorite videos
or albums to VIERA CAST,
you can choose them easily
from the Home screen.
Panasonic Select
Featured Videos
Images are for illustration change without notice.
Regarding “Settings”
Set VIERA CAST Home screen.
ꢁMy Account: You can remove your account from the unit.
ꢁLock:
Enter a password to lock YouTube and Picasa Web
Albums.
ꢁNotices
To return to VIERA CAST Home screen
Press [VIERA CAST].
To exit
Press [EXIT].
ꢁSet “Network Lock” to “On” to restrict using VIERA CAST. (➡ 97)
ꢁSet “Automatic Volume Control” to “Off” when the audio is warped
while using VIERA CAST. (➡ 97)
ꢁWhen display of the contents is truncated, set “Picture Zoom” to
“In”. (➡ 97)
ꢁSet “Region Selection” or “Daylight Saving Time” when wrong time
is displayed on the screen. (➡ 94)
RQT9428
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control”.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”.You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
ꢁVIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
ꢁThis unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
ꢁPlease refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation
1
2
3
4
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable (➡ 17) or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (➡ 100).
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 92). (The default setting is “On”.)
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control”
function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”
Download from the TVꢃ1
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV to the unit and the TV stations are
assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as on the TV (➡ 19).
Easy playback
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode and the TV
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]ꢃ2, [ ](PLAY)ꢃ3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
q
Power on link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]ꢃ2, [ ] (PLAY)ꢃ3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
q
BD-V DVD-V CD
ꢁ
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even
if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit is set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.
ꢁWhen this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.
About the Standby Power Save functionꢃ4
Even with “Power Save” set to “Off” (➡ 94), this unit turns to “Power Save” states (➡ 19) when Power off link works, so it is possible to reduce
the power consumption while this unit is in standby mode.
ꢁ“Standby Power Save” setting is required to be activated on the TV.
ꢁWhen turning this unit on or off without using Power off link function, this unit will not turn to “Power Save” states.
Direct TV Recordingꢃ1
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
ꢁDepending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function may not work if you select the TV channels on this unit.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operation.
ꢁThe titles are recorded to HDD.
To stop recording
Press [
]
g
Playing music continuously even after turning off power to the televisionꢃ5
(➡ 71, Playing music continuously even after turning off power to the television)
ꢃ1 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
ꢃ2 This button is available only when this unit is on.
ꢃ3 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [
] or [
] to go back to where playback started.
u
t
ꢃ4 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 4”.
ꢃ5 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.
Note
ꢁThese functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
ꢁAbout “HDAVI Control” function, read the instructions of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT9428
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
ꢁThe operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
Using the FUNCTION MENU window to operate this unitꢃ1
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window using the TV remote control.
ꢁIf this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press [OK].
ꢁAbout the FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 13, 83).
Pause Live TV programmeꢃ2
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to
briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
ꢁThis unit turns on automatically.
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (➡ below) and press [OK].
ꢁThe TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [ ] while the Control Panel is displayed.
r
2 Press [
,
w q
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Refer to “Note” on page 83, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unitꢃ1
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using “Control Panel” (➡ below).
1 Press [OPTION].
Switch to TV
Displayed when watching with the tuner of this unit.
It will return to the TV picture.
e.g.,
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
Control Panel is displayed (➡ below).
FUNCTION MENU window is displayed (➡ above).
Switch the screen mode (➡ 82).
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
Top Menu
Menu
Top Menu
BD-V DVD-V
Top menu is displayed (➡ 22).
Drive Select
DVD-V
Menu
Menu is displayed.
OK
BD-V
Pop-up Menu
Drive Select
Pop-up Menu is displayed (➡ 22).
Select the HDD, BD or SD drive
Rotate the still picture (➡ 63).
RETURN
Note
Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)
Rotate LEFT (JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG)
Zoom out (JPEG)
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for
DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is copying.
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Enlarge or shrink the still picture (➡ 63).
■Using the Control Panel
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).
Control Panel
The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right).
ꢁWhen playing a title, etc.
h
Exit
–[ ]: Pause, [ ]: Stop, [ ]: Search backward, [ ]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]:
e
r
w
q
Exit the Control Panel.
ꢁWhile playing still pictures
t
q
y
–[ ]: Stop, [ ]: View previous picture, [ ]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control
r
w
q
g
Panel.
ꢃ1 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.
ꢃ2 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
■ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [ ] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
^
■ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➡ 92).
RQT9428
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions to playback and viewing
Angleꢃ
Change the number to select an angle.
BD-V DVD-V +R +R DL +RW
Using on-screen menus
Common procedures
HDD BD-RE BD-R
Audio channel
(titles in recording mode other
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) -RW(VR)
than DR)
1 Press [DISPLAY].
(➡ 39, Changing audio during play)
Disc
Digital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
Subtitle
ꢃ
Play
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (➡ 22) on the disc.
ꢁThe display changes according to the disc content.You cannot
Off
Picture
Sound
L R
Audio channel
change when there is no recording.
Setting
Menu
Item
ꢁDepending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
Audio attribute
Signal type
LPCM/ Digital/ Digital+/
TrueHD/DTS/DTS-HD/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
ꢁThe menu is not displayed when playing still pictures.
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
2 Press [ , ] to select the menu and
e r
press [ ].
q
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
DAN: Danish
POR: Portuguese POL: Polish
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
THA: Thai
3 Press [ , ] to select the item and
e r
press [ ].
q
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
ITA:
Italian
4 Press [ , ] to select the setting.
e r
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
CHI:
Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
FIN:
ꢄ:
Finnish
Others
ꢁSome items can be changed by pressing [OK].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
VIE:
Vietnamese
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
AVCHD
Video
The video recording method appears
BD-V
Signal Type
ꢁPrimary Video
Video:
The video recording method appears.
Select the type of audio or language.
Soundtrack:
ꢁSecondary Video
Video:
Select on/off of images.
The video recording method appears.
Select on/off of audio and the language.
Soundtrack:
Soundtrackꢃ
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL
-RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
The disc’s audio attributes appear, except the title in DR mode
and the title copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)
on HDD, BD-RE and BD-R.
DVD-V AVCHD
Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
Subtitleꢃ
BD-V DVD-V AVCHD
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ right,
Language).
HDD BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL
-RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off, except the title in DR mode and the title
copied from high definition video (AVCHD format) on HDD,
BD-RE and BD-R.
ꢁSubtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
ꢁ“Text” or subtitle number is displayed even if there are not
multiple subtitles.
HDD BD-RE BD-R
Audio Selection
(titles recorded in DR mode,
or copied from HD video (AVCHD format))
Switch in the case of multiple audio.
BD-V
Subtitle Style
Select the subtitle style recorded on the disc.
RQT9428
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Play menu—Change the play sequence
Sound menu—Change the sound quality
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Sound Effects
HDD BD-RE BD-R BD-V RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
+RW DVD-V -RW(VR) CD AVCHD
Repeat Play
ꢁRe-master1
ꢁRe-master2
Items displayed depends on the contents of the playback.
(Discs record at 48 kHz or less)
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher
frequency signals not recorded on the track.
ꢁAll
ꢁTitle
ꢁChapter
ꢁPlaylist
ꢁV.Surround1
ꢁV.Surround2
(2-channel or over only)
Select “Off” to cancel.
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front
speakers only.
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
–Turn V.Surround off if it causes distortion. (Check the
surround function on the connected equipment.)
–V.Surround does not work for bilingual recordings.
Mode
Select the picture quality mode during play.
ꢁThis function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal
or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when “Digital
Audio Output” is set to “PCM”. (However, in this case, audio
is output as 2ch from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)
ꢁNormal:
ꢁSoft:
Default setting
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Details are sharper
ꢁFine:
ꢁCinema:
Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark
scenes. (This does not affect the titles in DR
mode.)
Dialogue Enhancer
HDD BD-RE BD-R BD-V RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
+RW DVD-V -RW(VR) AVCHD
(3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
HD optimizer
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
It will compensate the mosaic noise in the video and haze
around the characters precisely.
Progressiveꢃ(➡ 119)
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 118, Film and video).
ꢁAuto:
ꢁVideo:
ꢁFilm:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges
of the film content
appear jagged or rough
when “Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
to the right, then select
“Auto”.
ꢃ
It will work in following conditions.
–When “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off” (➡ 92) and
“Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is “576p/480p”
(➡ 93)
–When “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off” (➡ 92) and
DVD-V
playing
RQT9428
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions to playback and viewing
Status messages
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen
When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and right sides
Press [STATUS ].
of the screen, you can enlarge the image to fill the screen.
The display changes each time you press the button.
1 Press [OPTION].
A
2 Press [ , ] to select “Aspect” and
e r
press [OK].
B
3 Press [ , ] to select the item.
w q
C
ꢁNormal:
When watching the TV programme
Normal output
ꢁSide cut:
A
HDD
The black bars on the right and left sides of the 16:9 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
right and left sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
The remaining time and recording mode
73:27 DR
002 ABC TV Sydn
All DVB Channels
10:30
1 TEN HD
C
Corontation street
9:00 - 11:00
Select Favourites
Software update
Now
Rating:PG
Digital channel information (➡ 21)
When recording the TV programme
Display as frame
on the 4:3 aspect
ratio TV screenꢃ
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB
16:9 image with
black bars on
the right and left
A
HDD
REC1
memory
Recording status
Channel/The name of the station
023 ABC HDTV
Recording in background/copy progress
indicator (When recording 2 programmes
simultaneously.)
002 ABC T REC 2
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
Displayed with black
bars on right and left
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
B
Recording mode
Date and time
Available recording time and
recording mode
18:53:50 11.11.2009
ꢃ
Only when “TV Aspect” (➡ 92) is set to “Letterbox”.
■
Title number and
elapsed time
during recording/
Recording mode
Remain
HDD 45:53 DR
■
T1 0:05.14 XP
1
T2 0:10.10 DR
T2 0:00.10 DR
0:35.32
ꢁZoom:
2
The black bars on the top and bottom sides of the 4:3 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
top and bottom sides of the image are cut off when the
black bar is not displayed.
Current position
Total time
All DVB Channels
Select Favourites
Software update
10:30
1 TEN HD
Corontation street
9:00 - 11:00
C
Now
Rating:PG
Digital channel information (➡ 21)
When using Pause Live TV
4:3 image with
black bars at the
top and bottom
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Zoom
Displayed as frame
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
A
HDD
PLAY
Play status
4 Press [OK].
Pause Live TV
Note
Current time
B
ꢁThe screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following
situations:
–when you change channel
18:53:50 11.11.2009
Live 18:53.50
–when you start or end the playback of a title
–when the unit is turned off or on.
Play 18:40.12
BD-V DVD-V
ꢁ
“Side cut” does not have any effect.
ꢁWhen “TV Aspect” (➡ 92) is set to “Pan & Scan” or “Letterbox”, the
“Zoom” effect is disabled.
The time when the picture currently displayed
on the television was broadcasted
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9428
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUNCTION MENU window/Pause Live TV
FUNCTION MENU window
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If
you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
FUNCTION MENU
Preparation
Time Remaining
22:30 DR
ꢁTurn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Playback
Recording
Delete
ꢁTurn on this unit.
Copy
TV Guide
1 Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
Others
OK
RETURN
2 Press [
1 2
CH] to select the channel.
2 Press [ , ] to select an item and
e r
3
When you want to pause the TV programme
press [OK].
Press [ ].
h
ꢁIf you select “Others” and press [OK], the following screen
HDD
PAUSE
appears. Press [
,
e r
] to select an item and press [OK].
Pause Live TV
FUNCTION MENU
Time Remaining
22:30 DR
Playback
Flexible Recording
Recording
Delete
DV Automatic Recording
Network
Setup
Copy
TV Guide
Others
OK
4
When you want to resume
RETURN
Press [ ] (PLAY).
q
ꢁIf you press [RETURN ], you can return to the previous
screen.
Refer to “FUNCTION MENU” for detailed information. (➡13)
ꢁThe programme is saved on the HDD in DR recording
mode.
ꢁProgrammes can be saved temporary up to 8 hours on the
HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Operation during Pause Live TV
Press [
,
].
t y
Search
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
ꢁPress [ ](PLAY) to restart play.
q
Press [ ].
h
Pause
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart.
q
Press and hold [ ] (PLAY/×1.3).
q
Quick View
ꢁPress again to return to the normal speed.
While paused, press [
] or [
].
y
t
Slow-
motion
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
ꢁPress [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.
q
1 Press [ ].
g
Stop Pause
Live TV
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and
w q
press [OK].
Note
ꢁTemporary save is stopped in following cases.
–When save time exceeds 8 hours
–When there is no HDD free space
–When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously
ꢁThe Pause Live TV function does not work
–The clock is not set.
–While 2 programmes simultaneous recording
–While watching a programme being recorded
–When DV is selected
ꢁWhen this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes while
the screen is being displayed the screen saver is displayed [only
when “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 91)]. To
return to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].
RQT9428
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR) SD
Setting the protection
BD-RE BD-R RAM
Common procedures
Preparation
ꢁPress [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD or SD drive. Select “BD”
for DVD.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Disc
e r
Protection” and press [OK].
1
While stopped
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles 11
press [OK].
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used 0 : 22
FUNCTION MENU
Disc Name
DVD-RAM
Time Remaining
4:00 EP
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
On
Playback
Playlists
Recording
Delete
DV Automatic Recording
Recording via AV2 input
Network
Copy
OK
RETURN
DVD Management
Setup
TV Guide
Others
OK
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
RETURN
3 Press [ , ] to select “Blu-ray Disc
e r
To return to the previous screen
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press [OK].
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RAM
e.g.,
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles 11
Providing a name for a disc
BD-RE BD-R RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
You can provide a name for each disc.
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used 0 : 22
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Off
Preparation
BD-RE BD-R RAM
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ above, Setting the
OK
RETURN
protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Disc Name”
e r
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
(➡ 76, Entering text)
ꢁThe disc name is displayed in the Blu-ray Disc/DVD Management
window.
Blu-ray Disc Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles
1
0
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used
My favorite
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
ꢁ
ꢁ
With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
+RW
The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
My favorite
01
01/02
02
Chapter
1
Chapter
2
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9428
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles
Enabling the unit’s recording
function—Format
BD-RE BD-R RAM
BD-RE BD-R RAM -RW(V) +RW -RW(VR)
Preparation
+R +R DL
SD
(New disc only)
ꢁRelease protection (➡ 84, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 84, Common procedures)
Preparation
BD-RE BD-R RAM SD
ꢁ
Release protection (➡ 11, 84, Setting the
1 Press [ , ] to select “Delete all
e r
protection).
titles” and press [OK].
Note
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 84, Common procedures)
press [OK].
1 Press [ , ] to select, “Format Disc”
e r
A message appears when finished.
or “Format Card” and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
To return to the previous screen
[OK].
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
Press [EXIT].
press [OK].
Note
ꢁOnce deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
ꢁStill picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.
ꢁDelete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
A message appears when formatting is finished.
Note
ꢁFormatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
RAM
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes (
).
ꢁDo not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
4 Press [OK].
Note
ꢁWhen a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
-R -R DL CD
ꢁ
Formatting cannot be performed.
ꢁYou can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
RAM
To stop formatting
Press [RETURN ].
ꢁYou can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9428
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
Note
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than the time displayed on the confirmation screen
(approximately four times).
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
After finalising
+RW
Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu (
).
BD-R -R -R DL +R +R DL
The disc becomes play-only and
ꢁ
you can no longer record or edit.
Preparation
-RW(V)
ꢁ
You can record and edit the disc after formatting
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive. Select “BD” for DVD.
(➡ 85) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 84, Common procedures)
ꢁYou cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
1 Press [ , ] to select “Top Menu” and
e r
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
ꢁ
If you finalise discs recorded on
press [OK].
Panasonic equipment other than this unit, the background
selected as “Top Menu” may not be displayed.
2 Press [ , , , ] to select the
e r w q
ꢁDiscs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
background and press [OK].
Top Menu List
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
+RW
1
2
3
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a
+RW disc on other equipment.
Display after finalising
01
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Title Name
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left)
before creating top menu.
ꢁYou can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 47,
Change Thumbnail)
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive. Select “BD” for DVD.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Auto-Play Select
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 84, Common procedures)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Create Top
e r
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
Menu” and press [OK].
Preparation
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive. Select “BD” for DVD.
[OK].
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 84, Common procedures)
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
1 Press [ , ] to select “Auto-Play
e r
press [OK].
Select” and press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts.You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
2 Press [ , ] to select “Top Menu” or
e r
“Title 1” and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Note
Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying the top menu.
ꢁYou can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalising the disc.
BD-R
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
ꢁFinalising BD-R prevents accidental recording or editing.
ꢁBD-R that were recorded on this unit may not be played on other
Blu-ray players, etc. whether or not you finalise it.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive. Select “BD” for DVD.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 84, Common procedures)
1 Press [ , ] to select “Finalise” and
e r
press [OK].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press
w q
[OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Start” and
w q
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
Note
ꢁYou cannot cancel finalising.
ꢁFinalising takes up to 15 minutes.
-R DL +R DL
(
Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
ꢁDo not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
RQT9428
4 Press [OK].
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using the Setup menu.
ꢁThe settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tuning
■ Favourites Edit
Common procedures
You can create four groups of channels for making, viewing, and
recording easier. Editing these groups does not affect the channel
setting itself.
1
While stopped
ꢁTimer recording may not work correctly if you edit the groups
during timer recording standby.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and
e r
Press the “Blue” button to select the group.
press [OK].
Favourite Editor
All DVB Channels
2 ABC
Favourite 1
20 ABC HDTV
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and
e r
press [OK].
Setup
Tuning
Select Channel
Store
RETURN
HDD / Disc
Picture
Add
Add all
Select Favourites
Sound
Display
To add channels to a group
Connection
Network Settings
Others
1 Press [
,
] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”
e r
column and press the “Green” button.
ꢁRepeat this step to add other channels.
ꢁPress the “Yellow” button to add all the available channels to the
group. (This function is available only when no channels have
been added to the group.)
OK
RETURN
4 Press [ , ] to select the tab and
e r
2 Press [OK] to save the group.
press [OK].
To change the order of channels of a group
q
1 Press [ ]ꢃ.
5 Press [ , ] to select the menu and
e r
2 Press [
,
] to select the channel in the “Favourites” column to
e r
press [OK].
move and press the “Green” button.
3 Press [
,
] to select the new position of the channel and press
e r
the “Green” button.
ꢁRepeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the group.
6 Press [ , , , ] to select the option
e r w q
and press [OK].
ꢁFollow the instruction on the screen if the operation method
is different.
To delete channels on a group
q
1 Press [ ]ꢃ.
2 Press [
press the “Yellow” button.
ꢁRepeat this step to delete other channels.
ꢁPress the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
group.
,
] to select the channel in the “Favourites” column and
e r
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
3 Press [OK] to save the group.
Deleting a channel from a group does not affect the channel itself.
You can still select the channel from the “All DVB Channels”
group.
To change the name of a group in the “Favourites”
column
q
1 Press [ ]ꢃ.
2 Press the “Red” button.
ꢁUser input screen appear.
3 Press [
,
,
,
] to select a character and press [OK].
e r w q
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
ꢁTo delete a character
Press the “Red” button.
4 Press [RETURN ].
ꢃ
When the station name of the “All DVB Channels” column is
highlighted
■ DVB Channel list
You can set channel list and change the channel number.
1 Press [
2 Press [
,
] to select “DVB Channel list” and press [OK].
] to select the channel.
e r
,
e r
To hide the channel
You can skip it by pressing [1 2CH] while watching TV programme
on this unit.
(But you can select it by pressing the numbered buttons to enter the
channel number directly.)
3 Press [OK]. The check mark disappears.
ꢁPress [OK] again to cancel.
To change the channel number
3 Press the “Green” button and press the numbered buttons to set
the channel number you want.
4 Press [OK] to confirm it.
Note
ꢁYou can confirm the current channel setting. Press the “Red”
button, tuning will start.
RQT9428
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
■ Auto-Tuning
■ DVB Signal Condition
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 18) fails for some
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
reason.
1 Press [
,
] to select “Auto-Tuning” and press [OK].
e r
When the confirmation screen appears
2 Press [ ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
When “DVB Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
,
w q
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Tuning. When
the unit is on and stopped
2 Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
3 Display the Setup menu again (➡ 87).
Press and hold [ CH] and [CH ] on the main unit until
2
1
Region Selection screen appears. (➡ 18)
Press [
,
] to select “DVB Signal Condition” and press [OK].
e r
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [ CH] to select the channel.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings PIN and clock
settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
12
DVB Signal Condition
Channel Name
No service
■ Download from TV
0
0
10
10
Signal Quality
You can use “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later) compatible TV with an HDMI
cable.
Signal Strength
Chan.Up
Chan.Down
RETURN
Signal Quality
1 Press [
,
] to select “Download from TV” and press [OK].
e r
When the confirmation screen appears
2 Press [ ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Below 2 (display red):
The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the
pictures and sound.
,
w q
Tuning will start automatically.
2–5 (display orange):
The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the
pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green):
■ DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually when the DVB Auto-Tuning could
not complete successfully.
Optimum picture and sound quality.
1 Press [
,
e r
] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].
Signal Strength
DVB Manual Tuning
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
ꢁWhen the signal is weak:
Physical Channel
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
[CH6]
177.50
New
MHz
10
10
0
0
No.
Channel Name
Type
–adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
–adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu (➡ left).
DVB: 0
Select frequency
Start tuning
Select offset
RETURN
–check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
2 Press [
,
,
] to select the channel you want to set.
] to adjust the frequency.
e r
3 Press [
w q
ꢁThe frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.125 MHz.
ꢁAdjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays.
[Refer to “DVB Signal Condition” (➡ below) for signal quality and
signal strength.]
4 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
■ New Channel Message
When a new DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you press
[OK], Auto-Tuning starts.
1 Press [
,
] to select “New Channel Message”.
] to select “Automatic” or “Off”.
e r
2 Press [
,
w q
5 Press [EXIT] and press [
channels have been selected.
CH] to check that applicable
12
[Automatic]
[Off]
The channel messages are not shown.
■ Add New DVB Channels
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
1 Press [
,
] to select “Add New DVB Channels” and press [OK].
e r
The unit starts searching for newly available terrestrial digital
channels. This takes about 3 minutes.
Add New DVB Channels
Scan
6
69
This will take about 3 minutes.
CH
Channel Name
Type
Quality
DVB: 0
Searching
RETURN
A message is displayed when the search is finished.
“No new channels found” is displayed when no new services can
be found.
2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
RQT9428
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD-Video Ratings
HDD/Disc
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will
be the common PIN for both “DVD-Video Ratings” and “BD-
Video Ratings”.
Do not forget your PIN.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Settings for Playback
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Soundtrack for BD-Video / DVD-Video
[English]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[8 No Limit]
[1 to 7]
All DVD-Video can be played.
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with
corresponding ratings recorded on them.
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
[Other ꢄꢄꢄꢄ]ꢃ
ꢁChanging settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
Subtitle for BD-Video / DVD-Video
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Other ꢄꢄꢄꢄ]
[Change PIN]
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
[Temporary Unlock]
ꢃ
automatically appear if available on that disc.
Enter a code (➡ 105) with the numbered buttons. When the
selected language is not available on the disc, the default
language is played. There are discs where you can only switch
the language from the menu screen (➡ 22).
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Other ꢄꢄꢄꢄ]ꢃ
BD-V DVD-V
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
ꢁSome discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
Menu for BD-Video / DVD-Video
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Other ꢄꢄꢄꢄ]ꢃ
Settings for Recording
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Play Video (AVCHD) on BD-RE/BD-R
Recording time in EP mode
Set when you are playing a disc that has high definition video
(AVCHD) recorded by the camcorder and high definition quality
title that was recorded on this unit.
ꢁIt can be played regardless of the setting for discs that do not
have both recorded.
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(➡ 31, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
[6 Hours]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
[8 Hours]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
[On]
[Off]
Playback high definition video (AVCHD)
Playback high definition quality title
ꢁThe sound quality is better when using “6 Hours” than when
using “8 Hours”.
BD-Live Internet Access
You can restrict Internet access when BD-Live functions are
used.
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
mode.
[Permit]
Internet access is permitted for all BD-Live
contents.
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including
[Limit]
Internet access is permitted only for BD-Live
contents which have content owner certificates.
Internet access is prohibited for all BD-Live
contents without a certificate.
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
[16:9]
[4:3]
ꢁWhen recording to the HDD, BD-RE, BD-R or DVD-RAM with
“Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be
recorded in the original aspect ratio.
[Prohibit]:
Internet access is prohibited for all BD-Live
contents.
ꢁIn the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
BD-Video Ratings
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Set a ratings level to limit BD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will
be the common PIN for both “DVD-Video Ratings” and “BD-
Video Ratings”.
Do not forget your PIN.
Setting ratings (When no limit is selected)
[No Limit]
All BD-Video can be played.
[0 to 254 year(s)]
Prohibits play of BD-Video with
corresponding ratings recorded on them.
ꢁChanging settings [When 0 to 254 year(s) is selected]
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Change PIN]
[Temporary Unlock]
RQT9428
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Rec for High Speed Copy
Picture
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted
(➡ below).
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Still Mode
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is valid for the following cases:
–Recording TV programmes in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes
–Recording from an external equipment (including DV
equipment)
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (➡ 118,
Frames and fields).
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
–Copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture
is clearer and finer.)
[On]
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
[
,
w q
ꢁThe following restrictions are applied to
recorded titles.
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio
set in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 89).
–Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ right).
–You are no longer able to switch the audio
when watching a programme on an input
channel on the TV connected to this unit.
ꢁIt is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos.
[On]
The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly.
This does not work when there are several audio
types included on the playlist and when using
Quick View (PLAY×1.3). Additionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change
slightly.
[Off]
Note
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments
may change slightly.
Titles recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode on HDD cannot be
copied to BD-RE or BD-R using high speed mode, regardless of
the above setting.
[Off]
The points where chapters in playlists change are
played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a
moment.
BD/DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible discs).
NTSC Video Output
Select how the NTSC image is output.
[Maximum]
[NTSC]
[PAL60]
Output as NTSC.
[Normal (Silent)]
The noise generated by this unit is less
than when “Maximum” is selected,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).
Convert and output as PAL60. Select this when
connected to the PAL format TV.
Sound
HDD Management
ꢁPress and hold [OK] for 3 seconds to show the following
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
settings.
Dynamic Range Compression
BD-V DVD-V
Delete all titles
Delete all titles in HDD.
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
ꢁ
Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
[On]
[Off]
[Automatic]
Format HDD
Format of the HDD is performed.
Downmix
Switch the downmix system for playing back multi-channel
surround sound.
ꢁWhen “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD” or “DTS/DTS-HD” or
“MPEG” is set to “Bitstream”, there are no downmix effects for
the audio output.
ꢁThe audio output will be in “stereo” in the following cases.
–AVCHD playback
–Playback of clicking sound on the menu and audio with
secondary video in picture-in-picture mode
[Stereo]
When connected to equipment that does
not support the virtual surround function
[Surround encoded] When connected to equipment that
supports the virtual surround function
Bilingual Audio Selection
(Only when recording from DV input)
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
ꢁCopying to a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+RW.
ꢁ“Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled. (➡ left)
ꢁRecording sound in LPCM (➡ 91, “Audio Mode for XP
Recording”).
[M 1]
[M 2]
ꢁYou cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
ꢁWhen recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ 91).
Digital Audio Output
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
RQT9428
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCM Down Conversion
Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
It will be converted to 48 kHz regardless of the setting in
following cases.
Selects the initial setting for Audio tracks.
If programme has both Dolby Digital and MPEG audio tracks,
priority is given to what you select.
ꢁThe signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz.
ꢁThe disc has copy protection.
Only the selected audio is recorded when recorded or copied in
HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP or FR recording mode.
(It is recorded in accordance with the setting of “Audio Selection”
in the Disc menu only when it is copied with “Copy Title Playing”.)
BD-V
ꢁ“BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”. (
)
[On]
Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when
the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Dolby Digital]
A method of coding digital signals developed by
Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2ch)
audio, these signals can also be multi-channel
audio.
[Off]
Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[MPEG]
An audio compression method that compresses
audio to small size without any considerable
loss of audio quality.
ꢃ1
Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD
ꢃ2
DTS/DTS-HD
ꢃ1
Audio Channels for HG/HX/HE/HL Recording
This will set the audio when recording to the HDD in HG, HX, HE
or HL modes, or converting the recording mode (➡ 48).
MPEG
Select to output Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS Digital surround, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS HD
Master Audio or MPEG as bitstream or PCM.
[5.1-channel]ꢃ
Record using 5.1 ch audio
Note
[2-channel]
Record using 2 ch audio.
ꢁNot making the proper settings may result in noise.
ꢁIf the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the
specifications of the connected equipment take preference
over this unit and audio selected in these items may not be
output (e.g., when a television is connected, the HDMI audio
output of this unit is limited to down-mixed 2ch.)
ꢃIf the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is
mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output
from two front speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch
speaker connection.
[Bitstream]
Select “Bitstream” when the connected
equipment can decode the respective audio
format.
Display
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
–Connect equipment supporting HDMI Ver. 1.3
and use a High Speed HDMI Cable in order to
output high bit rate audio such as Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio or DTS-HD Master Audio.
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (➡ 21) disappears automatically.
The length of time the control panel (➡ 79) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment
cannot decode the respective audio format.
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
Refer to the operating instructions for connected
devices to verify whether or not they can decode
each of the audio formats.
Set the speaker output on the amplifier when
output with PCM.
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 94) to “On”, and is changed to “Bright” if you set “Power Save”
to “Off”.
ꢃ1 The default setting is “PCM”.
ꢃ2 The default setting is “Bitstream”.
[Bright]
[Dim]
[Automatic] The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this
mode, the standby power consumption can be
reduced.
BD-Video Secondary Audio
BD-V
(
with secondary audio)
Turn on/off the clicking sound on the menu and audio with
secondary video.
[On]
[Off]
The sampling frequency is converted to 48kHz.
Audio will be converted to Dolby Digital or DTS
during playback of the BD-Video with secondary
audio when “Bitstream” (➡ above) is selected.
Screen Saver
This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.
ꢁWhen this is set to “On”, the masked-off area on the screen
becomes grey.
Output in original audio method.
[Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component
video cable and “HDMI Video Format” (➡ 92) is set to any other
mode than “576p/480p”, or “Component Resolution” (➡ 93) is
set to “720p” or “1080i”]
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] (➡ 118)
[LPCM] (➡ 118)
[On]
If there is no operation for 10 minutes or more, the
displayed screen switches to the other states
automatically.
ꢁThe picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that
of normal XP mode recordings.
ꢁThe audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
ꢁWhen recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio
in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 90).
–When the Direct Navigator, TV Guide, Timer
recording list, Copying list, DELETE Navigator
or FUNCTION menu is displayed, the display on
the screen is not displayed.
–When Music is played, the display returns to the
screen saver mode. (Playback continues.)
–When still pictures are shown (except for
slideshows), the display returns to the Direct
Navigator screen.
–The display returns to the screen saver mode
when it is paused by the Pause Live TV. (Pause
status will continue.)
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s
DV input terminal (➡ 58).
[Stereo 1]
[Stereo 2]
Records audio (L1, R1).
Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
[Off]
ꢁWhen recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 90).
Teletext
Select the Teletext display mode. (➡ 21)
[TOP (FASTEXT)]
[List]
RQT9428
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
ꢃ1 Select “PAL60” for “NTSC Video Output” in the Setup menu
(➡ 90). If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60
signals the picture will not be shown correctly.
ꢃ2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System”.
ꢁWhen playing back a title recorded on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R,
ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or
NTSC).
SD Card LED Control
Set the lighting method for the lamp on the SD card slot.
[On]
[Off]
[SD inserted]
When this unit is turned on and SD card is
inserted, the lamp is lighted.
HDMI Connection
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Connection
HDMI Video Mode
Select “On” when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
[On]
[Off]
When the equipment such as amplifiers is
connected using HDMI cable, and TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal (setup
before connecting to the amplifiers.)
TV Aspect
Set to match the type of television connected.
[16:9]
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
HDMI Video Format
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed
for 16:9 picture.
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it
may be improved by changing the setting.
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, 16:9 picture is shown
in the letterbox style.
ꢁTo enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it
must also be 1080p compatible.
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen
television.
[576p/480p]
[720p]
All images other than 720p will be output as
1080i.
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
[1080i]
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect
with side panels.
[1080p]
When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend
using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are
less than 5.0 meters to prevent video distortion
etc.
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC
titles on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
[Automatic]
Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p,
1080i, 720p or 576p/480p).
[PAL]
[NTSC]
Note
ꢁSelect when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television.
ꢁSelect to record television programmes and PAL
input from other equipment.
ꢁSelect when playing a PAL input title recorded on
the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
ꢁPress the [ ] and [ ](PLAY) for more than 5 seconds when
the image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be set to
“576p/480p”.
g
q
BD-Video 24p Output
When playing BD-Video recorded in 24 frames, this unit
displays each frame at 1/24 second intervals the same interval
originally shot with the film movie.
ꢁSelect when connecting to a NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded
properly.
ꢁSelect to record NTSC input from other equipment.
ꢁSelect when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.
ꢁThis item is effective only when the unit is connected to a TV
with an HDMI terminal that supports 1080/24p input.
[On]
ꢁImages in 24p are output in 24p as they are. (Only
when “HDMI Video Format” is “Automatic” or
“1080p”)
ꢁThis unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)
ꢁIf “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be
used.
ꢁA disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.
You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System”
settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer
recording, change back the settings before the recording starts.
However,
–when video is being output at 24 frames, images
from any other terminal than the HDMI terminal
may not be output properly.
–when images other than 24p are played, images
are output at 60p.
[Off]
HDMI Audio Output
[On]
To change the setting all at once (PAL'NTSC)
[Off]
When connected to TV with HDMI cable, and
While stopped, keep pressing [ ] and [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the
g
;
connected to amplifiers not compatible to HDMI with
a DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
■ Types of disc or title recorded on HDD, BD-RE
VIERA Link
or BD-R for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback
a title recorded on HDD, BD-RE or BD-R using PAL or NTSC, refer
to this table.
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
[On]
(ꢂ: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI
Control”.
TV type
Disc/Titles recorded on
HDD, BD-RE or BD-R
Yes/No
ꢂ
Multi-system
TV
PAL
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
PAL
ꢂ
ꢂ
PAL TV
ꢂꢃ1 (PAL60)
RQT9428
NTSC TV
–
ꢂꢃ2
NTSC
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Resolution
This sets the video output resolution when using the component
video terminal.
Network Settings
IP Address/DNS Settings (➡ 96)
[576i/480i]
[576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
ꢁIf it is set to “720p”, images other than “720p” will be output as
“1080i”.
ꢁEven if you select “720p” or “1080i”, the video output resolution
is restricted to “576p/480p” when DVD-Video discs, DivX and
BD-Video discs recorded at a rate of 50 field per second and
images via AV1, AV2 or DV input are output from the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals.
Connection Test
[--]
IP Address Auto-assignment
[On]
[Off]
IP Address
[---.---.---.---]
Subnet Mask
[---.---.---.---]
Gateway Address
[---.---.---.---]
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
[On]
[Off]
Primary DNS
[---.---.---.---]
Secondary DNS
[---.---.---.---]
Connection Speed Auto-configure
[On]
[Off]
Connection Speed Setting
This is enabled only when “Connection Speed Auto-configure”
is turned “Off”.
[10BASE half duplex]
[100BASE half duplex]
[10BASE full duplex]
[100BASE full duplex]
Proxy Server Settings (➡ 97)
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Initialize
Set the setting of the “Proxy Server Settings” back.
Proxy Address
(The initial setting is blank.)
Proxy Port Number
(The initial setting is “0”.)
Connection Test
[--]
Network Service (➡ 97)
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Network Lock
You can restrict using VIERA CAST.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will
be the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “BD-Video
Ratings” and “Network Lock”
ꢁDo not forget your PIN.
[On]
[Off]
Changing Settings (When “On” is selected)
[Change PIN]
Automatic Volume Control
[On]
[Off]
Picture Zoom
[In]
[Out]
RQT9428
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Power Save
[On]
Others
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
turned to standby (➡ 114).
Automatic Standby
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
[Off]
This sets to Quick Start Mode.
ꢁ“Unit’s Display” (➡ 91) is fixed with “Automatic” when “Power
Save” is set to “On”, and is changed to “Bright” when “Power
Save” is set to “Off”.
[2 hours]
[4 hours]
[6 hours]
[Off]
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic
products close together.
System Update (➡ 98)
In order to update this unit’s software and to support system
changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs
software updates.
[BD 1]
[BD 2]
[BD 3]
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Use “Blu-Ray Disc (BD) 1”, the factory set code, under normal
circumstances.
Software Update in Standby
1 Press [
,
] to select the code (“BD 1”, “BD 2” or “BD 3”)
e r
and press [OK].
[On]
When you set this unit to standby mode, software
updates are downloaded automatically.
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
[Off]
Software Licence
Information about the software license is displayed.
■ When the following indicator appears on the
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-
on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 43).
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
Initialize
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
All the settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN
return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes
are also cancelled.
(➡ step 2).
Note
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the
main unit code to “BD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 2).
[Yes]
[No]
Default Settings
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
disc language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN, remote control
code, and network settings return to the factory presets.
Clock
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following setting.
Automatic Clock Setting
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts.
[Yes]
[No]
But, if the time is not set correctly, set it to “Off” and perform
“Manual Setting”. (➡ below)
[On]
[Off]
Region Selection
Select the region where you live to adjust the standard time.
ꢁThe time contained in the broadcast signal is UTC (Universal
time, coordinated).
[NSW/ACT]
[Victoria]
[Queensland]
[South Australia]
[Western Australia]
[Northern Territory] [Tasmania]
Daylight Saving Time
Select time offset from the standard time for Summer Time.
ꢁNormally select “Auto”.
ꢁIf there is a gap between displayed time and actual time, set
this function.
[Automatic]
[0 hour]
[+1/2 hour]
[+1 hour]
Manual Setting
ꢁPress [OK] to show the following setting.
Clock
Time
15
Date
1
:
45
:
39
.
8
.
2008
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
1 Press [
,
] to select the item you want to change.
w q
The items change as follows:
Hour
Minute
Second
Day
Month
Year
2 Press [
,
] to change the setting.
e r
3 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
RQT9428
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Settings
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
ꢁRepeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
ꢁIf your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
1 Point the remote control at the
television
Note
While pressing [ TV], enter the code
^
ꢁIf your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
01: [0] ➡ [1]
10: [1] ➡ [0]
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Manufacturer and Code No.
Brand
Panasonic
Code
01/02/03/04 METZ
Brand
Code
05/28
Press and hold [OK]
and [RETURN ]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the
unit’s display.
AIWA
35
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
05/19/20/47
AKAI
27/30
33
24
36
33
BEJING
BEKO
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX
74
BENQ
58/59
NOKIA
25/26/27/60/
61
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
BP
09
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
10
BRANDT
BUSH
10/15
05
45
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X
HOLD” disappears.
ONWA
30/39/70
05
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
66
ORION
69
PEONY
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
05
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
64/65
05
05
37/38
52
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
05
10/34
61
05
RADIOLA
SABA
05
21
10
53
SALORA
SAMSUNG
26
63/67
32/42/43/65/
68
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
SANSUI
SANYO
05
05
36
09
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
SCHNEIDER
SEG
05/69/75/76/
77/78
HIKONA
HITACHI
52
SELECO
05/25
18
05/22/23/40/ SHARP
41
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
05
08
JINGXING
TCL
31/33/66/67/
69
JVC
17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN
10/11/12/
13/14
KDS
52
TEVION
52
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
45
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
52
62
10/15/44
16/57
05
05/50/51
07/46
LOEWE
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
MAG
52
YAMAHA
18/41
RQT9428
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Settings
These settings are used when you will connect this unit to a
network.The connection to the Internet may take time or the internet
may not be connected depending on the connection environment. It
is recommended that you use a broadband connection.
■ Setting the DNS-IP
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without
making any changes.
When setting an assigned DNS server from your internet service
provider, perform the following settings.
■ Testing the connection
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when
new “IP Address/DNS Settings” have been made.
6 Press [ , ] to select “DNS-IP Auto-
e r
assignment” and press [ , ] to select “Off”.
w q
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
7 Press [ , ] to select “Primary DNS” or
e r
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
“Secondary DNS” and press [OK].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
e r
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
4 Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings” and
e r
press [OK].
press [OK].
ꢁFollow the instructions given by your internet service provider
and enter the numbers. If the number is unknown, then check
the number of other devices such as personal computers
connected via a LAN cable and assign the same number.
ꢁIf a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
5 Press [ , ] to select “IP Address/DNS
e r
Settings” and press [OK].
6 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Test” and
e r
press [OK].
9 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
IP Address / DNS Settings
Note
ConnectionTest
ꢁThe numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
IP Address Auto-assignment
IP Address
On
■ Setting the connection speed
When the connection test results in “Failed” after the IP and DNS-IP
addresses are assigned, perform the following settings.
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
On
On
6 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Speed Auto-
e r
Primary DNS
configure” and press [ , ] to select “Off”.
w q
Secondary DNS
7 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Speed
e r
Connection Speed Auto-configure
Connection Speed Setting
Setting” and press [ , ] to select a connection
w q
MAC Address: 00-0b-97-e6-7a-ae
OK
speed.
ꢁSelect a connection speed in accordance with the environment
of the network connected.
RETURN
ꢁWhen the settings are changed, the network connection may
be disabled depending on the device.
“Testing”: The test is in progress.
“OK”:
The connection is completed.
“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.
Note
ꢁPerform the “Connection Test” also when any change was made to
the “IP Address / DNS Settings”.
ꢁIf the connection test fails, it may be necessary to set the MAC
address of this unit at the router side. The MAC address can be
displayed by selecting “Network Settings” and “IP Address / DNS
Settings” in steps 1-5 (➡ above).
■ Setting the IP address
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without
making any changes.
Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server
functions or when the router’s DHCP server function is disabled.
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ above)
6 Press [ , ] to select “IP Address Auto-
e r
assignment” and press [ , ] to select “Off”.
w q
7 Press [ , ] to select “IP Address”, “Subnet
e r
Mask” or “Gateway Address” and press [OK].
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
ꢁAfter checking the specifications for your broadband router,
enter each number.
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable. Assign a different number from those of other devices for
“IP Address” and the same number for others.
ꢁIf a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].
IP Address
Please input IP Address and press “OK”.
The IP address will be cleared by pressing
“OK” when there is no number input.
192
0
1
.
.
.
-
9
Number
9 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
Note
RQT9428
ꢁThe numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Setting the proxy server
■ Setting the network service (VIERA CAST)
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without
making any changes.
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without
making any changes.
Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet provider.
ꢁSet the proxy server only after the connection test is completed
properly.
Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet provider.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [ , ] to select “Others” and press [OK].
e r
4 Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings” and
e r
3 Press [ , ] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
e r
press [OK].
4 Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings” and
e r
5 Press [ , ] to select “Network Service” and
e r
press [OK].
press [OK].
Network Service
5 Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Server Settings”
e r
and press [OK].
Network Lock
Off
Proxy Server Settings
Initialize
Automatic Volume Control On
In
Picture Zoom
Proxy Address
0
Proxy Port Number
Connection Test
----
OK
RETURN
OK
RETURN
6 Press [ , ] to select “Connection Test” and
e r
press [OK].
Proxy Server Settings
Initialize
Proxy Address
0
Proxy Port Number
Connection Test
----
OK
RETURN
“Testing...”: The test is in progress.
“Pass”:
The connection is completed.
Press [RETURN ] to exit.
“Fail”:
Please check the connection and settings.
7 Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Address” and
e r
press [OK].
(➡ 76, Entering text)
After the input of “Proxy Address” is completed
8 Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Port Number” and
e r
press [OK].
9 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
Proxy Port Number
Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Number
and press “OK”.The number will be set to “0”
by pressing “OK” when there is no number
input.
1
0
-
9
Number
10 Press [ , ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
w q
To set back to default setting
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ above)
1 Press [
,
] to select “Initialize” and press [OK].
] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
e r
2 Press [
,
w q
RQT9428
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Update
Software of this unit can be updated automatically by following
method.
ꢁFrom broadcasts
ꢁFrom Internet [network connection and setting is required. (➡ 96,
102)]
Update of the software is done when it is in standby mode.
Once the new software is found, it will start the download of the
software, and then update.
Download of the software will start automatically when the power of
this unit is turned off or when it is 3 a.m.
ꢁThe time it takes to update depends on the connection.
–For Broadcast: About 2 to 4 hours
–For Internet: About 1 hour
(It may take longer than specified above to download because
the download time differs depending on the network
environment. It is recommended to be used in a broadband
environment.)
If you do not want to perform the software update during the
standby mode, set “Software Update in Standby” in the Setup menu
to “Off”. (➡ 94)
■ If a software update is available, a notification is
displayed.
For broadcast
All DVB Channels
10:30
1 TEN HD
Corontation street
9:00 - 11:00
Select Favourites
Software update
Now
Rating:PG
Software update
ꢁFollowing screen is displayed when “Red” button is pressed.
For Internet
New software version has been found.
The software will be updated automatically
after the unit is switched to standby.
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead.
ꢁUpdate of the software will start when the power is turned off.
■ The unit’s display during the update
ꢁ“SW-DL”
: Software is downloading. Download will stop
when the power is turned on, or the timer
recording starts.
: Update of the software will start once the
download is completed.
ꢁ“START”ꢃ
ꢁ“UPD ꢀ/ꢀ”ꢃ : Software is updating.
ꢁ“FINISH”
: Updated of the software has completed.
ꢃ
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress
may damage the unit.
Note
ꢁIf the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the
start of the download, the download will not be executed.
–For broadcast: Within 4 hours
–For Internet: Within 1 hour
ꢁIf downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to the
Internet, then you can download the latest software from the
following website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software.
http://panasonic.net/support/
RQT9428
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
ꢃ
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.
Connecting a television with S VIDEO
terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
ꢁConnect to terminals of the same colour.
Connecting a stereo amplifier
ꢁConnect to terminals of the same colour.
ꢁSupplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
ꢁSupplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
Television’s rear panel
R
L
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN
Audio cable
S Video
cable
ꢅ
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
ꢅ
This unit’s rear panel
DIG
PR
Y
PB
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
AUDOUT
(PCM
ONENT
O OUT
BITREAM)
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting an amplifier with a digital
input terminal
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
Required setting
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 90)
ꢁWhen this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable or coaxial cable and connected to a television with an
HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the
disc by setting “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(➡92). In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
R
L
R
P
B
P
Y
ꢁBefore purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
ꢅ
Component
video cable
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
■ With OPTICAL
ꢁYou cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
Amplifier’s rear panel
OPTICAL IN
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
Insert fully with
this side up.
Optical digital audio cable
AUDIVIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
This unit’s rear
panel
ꢅ
DIGITAL
PB
Y
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
BITSTREAM)
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡119) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
ꢁConnect to terminals of the same colour.
ꢁSupplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
■ With COAXIAL
Required setting
Amplifier’s rear panel
COAXIAL IN
“Component Resolution” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 93)
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Set “Component Resolution” in the Setup
menu to “576i/480i” (➡ 93) and “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off”
(➡ 92) if you are concerned about it. This is the same for multi
system televisions using PAL mode.
Coaxial cable
DIGITAL
PB
Y
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
BITSTREAM)
CRT
DO NOT
O-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Progressive output
This unit
RQT9428
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted.You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
ꢁThis unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit rate Audio) technology (➡ 118, 119).
ꢁVideo sources converted to 1920x1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
ꢁPlease use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
ꢁWhen outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[➡ 78, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”)]
ꢁNon-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
ꢁIt is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
Receiver’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Required setting
ꢁSet “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio
Output” to “On” (➡ 92).
(The default setting is “On”.)
HDMI cable
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
HDMI AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Note
ꢁIf you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 118)
and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
ꢁYou cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9428
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
1
AC mains lead
(included)
Aerial
cable
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
17, 99)
6
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
(
5
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Cooling fan
2
3
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
Audio/Video
cable
4
RF coaxial
cable
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
VCR’s rear panel
Connecting a Digital television and VCR
To the aerial
Aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
cable
Splitter
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
Aerial
cable
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
3
1
AC mains lead
(included)
Aerial
cable
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
6
Audio/Video
(
17, 99)
5
cable
(included)
DIGITAL
PR
Y
PB
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
This unit’s rear panel
Cooling fan
2
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
Audio/Video
cable
4
VCR’s
rear panel
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette
DO NOT
recorder to the television, video signal will be affected by copyright
protection systems and the picture may not be shown correctly.
Television
When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both
television and VCR input terminals.
VCR
RQT9428
This unit
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Network connection
Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network.
ꢁThis document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection.
ꢁThis connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used.
You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST, for example
YouTube, Picasa Web Albums. (Current as of February 2009) (➡ 77)
ꢁVIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up Internet connections cannot be used.
Enjoying VIERA CASTTM
Enjoying BD-Live discs with
Internet
You can enjoy more functions such as subtitles, exclusive images and online games by connecting this
unit to the Internet. (➡ 44)
Automatically acquire the title
of the CD
Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist. (➡ 74)
Update the software of this
unit
Automatically update the software of this unit. (➡ 98)
ꢁUpdate of the software can be done from the broadcast too.
Internet
This unit’s rear panel
DIGITAL
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
BITSTREAM)
RF OUT
RF IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S
VIDEO
OPTICAL
Straight LAN cable
Hub or broadband router
ꢁWhen your communication equipment (modem), etc. has
no broadband router functions: Connect a broadband
router.When your communication equipment (modem), etc.
has broadband router functions but there are no vacant
ports: Connect a hub.
Telecommunications
equipment (modem, etc)
ꢁUse a router that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.
ꢁMake the necessary settings in “Network Settings” after connecting. (➡ 96)
Note
ꢁRefer to the operating instructions for the connected device.
ꢁIt may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used.
ꢁDepending on the contract with the provider, you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of terminals such as this unit or computers, or
an additional fee might be required.
ꢁUse only category 5 straight LAN cables (STP) when connecting to peripheral devices.
ꢁWhen operating the VIERA CAST, use high-speed internet service no less than 1.5 Mbps for SD (Standard Definition) and 6 Mbps for HD
(High Definition) picture quality by your local broadband company.
- If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed correctly.
ꢁInserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can damage the unit.
RQT9428
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations that can be performed simultaneously
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title
(ꢂ: Possible, –: Impossible)
Playback of
HDD
Playback of
discs
Playback of BD-
Video
Playback of still
pictures
Playback of
music recorded
on HDD
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
While recording to HDD in DR mode
–
–
ꢂꢃ
While recording to HDD in HG, HX, HE,
HL, XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes
–
ꢂ
–
ꢂ
–
While timer recording to disc
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
While recording from DV input
While copying in normal speed mode
–
–
While copying in high speed mode
–
–
[With finalising or creating Top Menu
+RW
(
)]
ꢂ
While copying in high speed mode
–
–
–
–
[Without finalising or creating Top Menu
+RW
(
)]
ꢃ
AVCHD
It cannot playback.
ꢁSimultaneous operation is not possible while executing “DV Automatic Recording” or “Recording via AV2 input”.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
Starting of timer recording possible during the following
operations
Starting of timer recording not possible during the following
operations
ꢁRecording the titleꢃ1
ꢁCopying a title in normal speed mode
ꢁCopying a title in high speed mode (with finalising)
ꢁCopying HD Video (AVCHD format)
ꢁEditing still pictures or music
ꢁCopying still pictures
ꢁPlaying the titleꢃ2
ꢁEditing the title
ꢁCopying a title in high speed mode (without finalising)
–Only 1 programme can be recorded
ꢁExecuting “DV Automatic Recording”ꢃ3
ꢁExecuting “Recording via AV2 input”ꢃ3
ꢁExecuting Pause Live TVꢃ1
ꢁCopying music
ꢁFormatting
ꢁFinalising/Creating Top Menu(
+RW
)
ꢃ1 Executing operation will terminate when 2 programmes
simultaneous recording cannot be performed.
ꢃ2 Playback of disc will terminate when the timer recording to disc is
started while playing back from the disc or when the timer
recording other than the DR mode has started while playing BD-
Video.
ꢃ3 Executing operation will be terminated.
RQT9428
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit
operations.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially purchased
video cassette, BD or DVD?
Set up
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes, BD and DVD are copy
Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital
terrestrial broadcasts?
protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
¾ You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the
area where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult
your local TV aerial installer.
Can the disc recorded with this unit play on other
equipment?
¾ Refer to “Play on other players” in “HDD and disc information”.
(➡ 8, 9)
Can this unit receive or record High Definition
(HD) broadcasts?
¾ Yes, this unit can receive and record High Definition (HD)
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
¾ Yes, you can. (But you may not high speed copy depending on
broadcasts. Record in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL recording mode.
the disc to copy or the title.) (➡ 50)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
What do I need to play multi channel surround
sound?
¾ Connect the appropriate amplifier/receiver to the HDMI AV
OUT terminal, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (OPTICAL,
COAXIAL). (➡ 99, 100)
¾ Title in DR mode on the HDD can be copied to disc at high
speed if the recording mode is converted using “Title
Compression”. (But you may not high speed copy depending
on the disc to copy or the title.) (➡ 48)
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card, or USB
memory after copying HD video (AVCHD format)
to the HDD?
Are the headphones and speakers directly
connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through
¾ It can be copied to the disc.
the amplifier etc. (➡ 99, 100)
BD-RE BD-R
–
–
It can be copied with HD quality.
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
It will be copied with
SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
¾ It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
My television has S VIDEO IN terminal,
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals and HDMI IN
terminal. Which should I connect with?
¾ The different levels of picture quality input are listed below in
order from highest to lowest. HDMI IN JCOMPONENT VIDEO
IN JS VIDEO IN JVIDEO IN. However, it will take longer for
the picture output to start up when this unit is connected with
the HDMI IN terminal.
Disc
Can I play BD-Video and DVD-Video bought in
another country?
¾ Playback of the following discs is not possible.
–BD-Video discs that do not include region “B”.
–DVD-Video discs that do not include region “4” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (➡ Cover)
Can BD-Video/DVD-Video that does not have a
region code/number be played?
¾ The region management information for BD-Video/DVD-Video
indicates that the disc conforms to industry standards.You
cannot play discs that do not conform to industry standards or
do not have a region code or number.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ Refer to “HDD and disc information”. (➡ 6–10)
RQT9428
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide
USB
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a
start and end time that are different from the TV
Guide system?
What can or cannot be done using the USB port
on this unit?
¾ You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory. (➡ 42, 62, 69)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to
the HDD. (➡ 66)
¾ You can manually change the start and end time of
programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (➡ 34)
¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (➡ 74)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 61)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the
HDD, BD-RE or BD-R. (➡ 60)
Can I receive TV Guide system data via a
connected satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner.
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
How can I cancel a timer programming?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then
press [DEL]. (➡ 36)
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (➡ 11)
What happens when I unplug the unit from the
household mains socket?
Music
¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.
What will happen if I try to record the same CD
multiple times?
¾ New album will be made following the existing album.
¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for
a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.
¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the
disc or USB memory?
¾ No, you cannot.
Regarding Frequently asked questions for copying (➡ 52)
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
7168 Tonga:
8382 Turkish:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic:
7773 Serbian:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
6669 Greenlandic:
7577 Guarani:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian:
Cambodian:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
RQT9428
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
On the television
Page
43
Authorisation Error.
ꢁYou are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code.You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
Cannot finish recording completely.
—
—
31
ꢁThe programme was copy-protected.
ꢁThe HDD or disc may be full.
ꢁThe maximum number of programme has been exceeded.
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
92
ꢁYou tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
Cannot record to the disc.
Unable to format.
15
ꢁThe disc may be dirty or scratched.
Cannot play on this unit.
115
15
ꢁYou tried to play a non-compatible image.
ꢁTurn the unit off and re-insert the card.
HDD BD-RE RAM -RW(V) +RW
Cannot record. Disc is full.
26, 47,
85, 90
ꢁ
Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles. [Even if
you delete recorded content from the BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no
increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.
—
—
ꢁUse a new disc.
No Disc
ꢁThe disc may be upside down.
ꢁThere is no compatible folder in this unit.
No folders.
115
15
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
ꢁThe card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
ꢁThe card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
11
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
26, 47,
68, 72,
75, 85,
90
ꢁCreate space by deleting any unnecessary items.
55, 67
ꢁDelete one or more items registered on the copying list to ensure that “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
The disc is not recordable.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Rental Expired.
—
ꢁThe unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert an unfinalised disc.
ꢁYou inserted an unformatted disc.
85
—
—
ꢁThe DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays.You cannot play it. (DivX)
ꢁSome operations are unsupported by the unit. For example;
This operation cannot be
5
BD-V
–
: During playback, reverse slow-motion or reverse frame-by-frame is not possible.
performed now.
—
ꢁDepending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film
previews and warning screens are being played back.
This operation is prohibited by
5
this disc.
When removing a recorded disc
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc for play on other equipment.
Finalise
Finalise the disc to enable playing on other
DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising.This may take up to min.
Finalise the disc ?
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other players
without finalising.
■ To finalise the disc
*
Press [ REC] on the main unit.
ꢁYou cannot stop this process once you have started it.
ꢁIf you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 86), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 86) or “Disc
Name” (➡ 84) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
■ To open the tray without disc finalisation
;
Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT9428
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
Page
94
BD ꢀ
ꢁThe remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
(“ꢀ” stands for a number.)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
GUIDE
37
98
—
—
ꢁTV Guide data is being downloaded.
FINISH
ꢁThe software update is complete.
HARD ERRꢃ
NoERAS
ꢁIf there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
ꢁYou cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
15
14
ꢁThe disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play or edit.
ꢁThis message may appear when the lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
;
NoWRIT
—
—
ꢁYou cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAITꢃ
ꢁDisplayed when the unit is started and turn off. This is not malfunction.
ꢁThere was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken.
Wait until the message disappears.
PROG FULLꢃ
REMOVE
START
ꢁThere are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
36
—
98
ꢁThe USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
ꢁUpdate of the software is started.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
SW-DL
98
85
ꢁSoftware is downloading.
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer recording starts.
UNFORMAT
ꢁYou inserted an unformatted BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORTꢃ
UPD ꢀ/ꢀ
U59
ꢁYou have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
ꢁYou tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
8–10
11
98
ꢁThe software is being updated.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
—
ꢁThe unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.
U61
—
—
ꢁ(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
U72
U73
ꢁThe HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
U76
—
ꢁHDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright
protection.
U77
U88
—
ꢁDue to the current disc not having authorised copyright information, video output is not performed.
108
ꢁ(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
U99
—
—
ꢁThe unit fails to operate properly. Press [ ] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now
press [ ] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
8
8
Hꢀꢀor Fꢀꢀ
ꢁThere is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
108–
113
ꢁCheck the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [ ] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
8
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
X HOLD
95
ꢁThe Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.
ꢃThe message are alternately displayed.
RQT9428
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
Updating to the latest software may solve the problem. (➡ 98)
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
Available disc space display is showing different
from what was used
ꢁRegular disc rotating sounds.
ꢁPoor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
ꢁImage disturbance during search.
ꢁInterruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
¾ Available disc space display may be different from actual.
Varying may be large especially when recorded in DR mode.
ꢁOperations are slow to respond in power save mode.
ꢁOperations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again
using a Panasonic disc.)
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be
ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following
ꢁThe unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being
to eject the disc.
activated. (Press and hold [ ] on the main unit for 10
8
1
Press [ ] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [ ] on
8
seconds.)
8
ꢁWhen the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [ ] and [CH ] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the
disc.
g
1
Power
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [ ].
^
TV screen and video
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
household mains socket. (➡ 16, 101)
Television reception worsens after connecting
the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
The unit switches to standby mode.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [ ] on the
8
main unit to turn the unit on.
The power is turned off automatically.
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, this unit will be automatically set to
standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (➡ 78)
The digital channel information or control panel
does not appear.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu will be displayed. (➡ 91)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback.
¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (➡ 79)
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,
when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically
turned to standby. For details please read the operating
instructions of the TV.
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn
the unit on.
Displays
Screen size is wrong.
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (➡ 91)
¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does
not have that function, set “Component Resolution” in the
Setup menu to “576i/480i” (➡ 93) and “HDMI Video Mode” to
“Off”. (➡ 92)
¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (➡ 92)
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to
“16:9” in the Setup menu. (➡ 92)
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (➡ 94)
The time recorded on the disc and the available
time shown do not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is different from
the actual recording time or MP3 recording time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It
does not increase if other titles are deleted.
¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the BD-R, DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.
¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after
recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200
times or more.
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
Compared to the actual recorded time, the
elapsed time displayed is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to
one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour
elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56
seconds). This does not affect the recording.
RQT9428
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound
The recorded title is stretched vertically.
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
No sound.
Low volume.
-R -R DL -RW(V)
–
If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
– If you recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode with “Aspect for
Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same
aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set
“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (➡ 89, 90)
– By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a
chance that the recording will be made using the wrong
aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when
recording. (➡ 89)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer
to your television’s operating instructions.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected
one. (➡ 16, 17, 90, 99–101)
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (➡ 39)
¾ Turn “Sound Effects” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the following
cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects
such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast titles.
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected
devices.
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT terminal.
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (➡ 81)
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,
set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” in the Setup menu. (➡ 92)
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ When “BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”, Dolby Digital
Plus and Dolby TrueHD are converted to 48 kHz Dolby Digital
and output or DTS-HD is converted to 48 kHz DTS and output.
In this case, set “BD-Video Secondary Audio” to “Off”. (➡ 91)
When playing DVD-Video using progressive
output, one part of the picture momentarily
appears to be doubled up.
¾ Set “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu to “576i/480i”
and “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off”. This problem is caused by the
editing method or material used on DVD-Video, but should be
corrected if you use interlace output. (➡ 93)
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (➡ 91)
There is no apparent change in picture quality
when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default
setting is “On”). (➡ 90)
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable, a
coaxial cable or an HDMI cable.You cannot switch the audio if
“Digital Audio Output” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Digital Audio
Output” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables. (➡ 90, 99)
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of
how the disc was created.
The images from this unit do not appear on the
television.
Picture is distorted.
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to VIDEO OUT
terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit. (➡ 16, 17, 99–101)
¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.
¾ Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is
not progressive compatible. Press and hold [ ] and [ ](PLAY)
Operation
Cannot operate the television.The remote control
doesn’t work.
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be
operated even if you change the code. (➡ 95)
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.
Change the code on the remote control. (➡ 94)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated
g
q
on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to
cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [ ] and
g
[
OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
;
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (➡ 92)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc
that matches with this unit’s TV system.
number button at the same time for
more than 5 seconds.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected
devices.
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (➡ 3)
¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s
remote control signal sensor during operation. (➡ 3)
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that
may be subject to sunlight exposure.
¾ Software is updating when “UPD ꢀ/ꢀ” is displaying on the
unit’s display. Wait until the update is completed. (➡ 98)
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control
again after changing the batteries. (➡ 94)
The picture is distorted during play, or video will
not play correctly.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavorable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
–between titles recorded with different recording modes.
–between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
–between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
–between playlist chapters.
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after
changing the batteries. (➡ 95)
¾ The child lock function is activated. (➡ 95)
RQT9428
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already
have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of
programmes can be recorded onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another
unit is not guaranteed.
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected
properly.
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to
disappear.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
Cannot record from external equipment.
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (➡ 57, 58, 101)
¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have
connected.
1
Press [ ] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [ ] on
8
8
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one
minute, then reconnect it.
¾ “One time only recording” title recorded to HDD from the
equipment connected to the external input cannot be copied to
BD-RE or BD-R due to the copyright protection regulations.
Use the DVD-RAM compatible with the CPRM.
2
Press [ ] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
8
Cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously.
¾ It cannot in following conditions.
Cannot eject disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
–Record 2 digital broadcasting programmes in other than DR
mode
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and
hold [ ] and [CH ] on the main unit at the same time for
–Record 2 programmes from external input
–Record 2 programmes to disc
–When performing high speed copying (1 programme can be
recorded to HDD)
g
1
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not
work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (➡ 95)
–Recording from DV input, while “Recording via AV2 input”
Cannot tune channels.
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme
Cannot download channel presets from the
times overlap (
is displayed). Correct the programme. (➡ 36)
television.
¾ Check the connections. (➡ 16, 101)
¾ You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later)
compatible TV with an HDMI cable to download channel presets.
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer
icon “ ” in the timer recording list is grey.) (➡ 35)
z
¾ Set the clock. (➡ 94)
¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not
be correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times
to allow a margin of a few minutes. (➡ 34)
Startup is slow.
¾ Make sure that “Power Save” is set to “Off”. (➡ 94)
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
Cannot timer record to the disc.
¾ It cannot timer record in following conditions.
–Unformatted disc
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
–
–Timer record to DVD-RAM in DR mode
–Disc with protect setting
–Destination disc for timer recording is registered already.
–Timer recording for “One time only recording” programme is
set to DVD-RAM not compatible to CPRM.
Recording, timer recording and
copying
The timer programme remains even after
recording finishes.
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly. (➡ 34)
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You can not record to the disc by pressing the [ REC].
*
¾ BD-RE with a cartridge cannot be recorded or copied.
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be
recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (➡ 8, 9)
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may
be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
BD-RE BD-R RAM
¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc.
-RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
(➡ 85)
¾ The disc is protected with DVD Management or Blu-ray Disc
Management. (➡ 84)
¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times
they can be recorded (CPRM). (➡ 118)
HDD BD-RE RAM -RW(V)
You will have to format the disc (
+RW
) or use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost programmes or discs. (➡ 85, 90)
¾ If you use Auto Renewal Recording, the old title will be deleted
¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the
number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or
use a new disc. (➡ 26, 47, 85, 90)
after the new title is recorded. (➡ 35)
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
¾
In the following situations,
Cannot copy to a disc using the high speed
mode.
you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and
then copy. (➡ 26, 47, 85)
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire
disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary)
¾ High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the
disc or title that is being copied. Refer to “When is the time high
speed copy is not possible?” for details. (➡ 52)
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be
copied has exceeded 499.
When copying, it takes a long time even when
high speed mode is selected.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum
speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6
hours when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not
compatible with EP (8 hours) mode recording.
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you
can record and copy again if you format BD-RE and DVD-RW.
¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to record onto
or edit them if you either insert and remove the disc or switch the
unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of 30 times.
¾ The discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other
Panasonic Recorders.
RQT9428
¾ Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be
able to be recorded to.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating disc.
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a disc, the sound of
the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is
not a problem.
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus
to make changes. (➡ 22)
¾ If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “BD/DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 90).
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to
“On”. (➡ 80)
The quality has dropped when the title in HDD is
copied to the disc.
¾ Titles in HD quality (titles recorded in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL
mode or titles in AVCHD) will be copied as SD quality when
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
copied to
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different
The DV Automatic Recording function does not
work.
angles are recorded.
¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,
check the connections and DV equipment settings. (➡ 58)
¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV
equipment appear on the television.
¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes
on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.
¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV Automatic Recording
may not operate properly.
You have forgotten your ratings PIN.
You want to cancel the ratings level.
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive,
then press and hold [ REC] and [ ] (PLAY) on the main unit
*
q
at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on
the unit’s display).
¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV
tape. (➡ 58)
Image for the Quick View is not smooth.
¾ Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR mode
Play
BD-V AVCHD
titles or
.
¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
Play fails to start even when [ ] (PLAY) is
q
pressed.
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
Play starts but then stops immediately.
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (➡ 15)
¾ The disc is dirty. (➡ 15)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
(➡ 10)
–open the disc tray.
SD CD USB
turn off the power.
Memorized positions will not be cancelled)
–
HDD
(
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the
equipment used for recording.
¾ You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that
was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD
Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
Slow-motion playback does not go reverse.
Reverse frame-by-frame does not work properly.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode. (➡ 89)
¾ You cannot playback while executing “Recording via AV2 input”
or when recording from the DV input.
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (➡ 92)
¾ Slow-motion playback in reverse does not work for title that has
BD-V AVCHD
copied the AVCHD and
.
BD-V AVCHD
¾
Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be done.
¾ Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
¾ Set “Play Video (AVCHD) on BD-RE/BD-R” to “On” for the disc
that has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded by the
camcorder and other video format such as those recorded on
this unit. (➡ 89)
AVCHD will be reversed in 10 frame units.
It takes time before play starts.
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
Picture stops.
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI
cable)
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
When [ ] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you
q
-R DL +R DL
¾
When playing a title recorded on both layers, the
may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching
layers. (➡ 39)
picture is displayed on the TV. Using [
beginning of the title.
], return to the
u
Edit
BD-Video or DVD-Video is not played.
Available disc space does not increase even after
deleting a title.
¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on BD-R,
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit BD-Video or DVD-Video
play. Change this setting. (➡ 89)
¾ Ensure the disc is for the correct BD-Video region code or
DVD-Video region number, and is not defective. (➡ Cover)
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (➡ 26)
BD-V
¾
You cannot playback while recording in recording mode
other than DR mode.
¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is
deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc
space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
RQT9428
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available
USB
space.
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on
the unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (➡ 15)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (➡ 11)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (➡ 116)
¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (➡ 11)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB
memory may not be recognized by this unit.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (➡ 26)
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
(➡ 15)
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in
this unit. (➡ 85)
Cannot mark the start point or the end point
during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other.You
cannot set an end point before a start point.
¾ You can use USB memories with capacities up to 128 GB.
Cannot create a playlist.
¾ Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
USB memory cannot be operated.
¾ Turn the power of this unit off once, and turn it back on. If it
cannot be operated after that, set “VIERA Link” to “Off”. (➡ 92)
Still pictures
TV Guide
Cannot display Direct Navigator screen.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
The TV Guide System does not receive any data.
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (➡ 94)
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the
TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.
Cannot edit or format a card.
¾ Release the card’s protection setting. (➡ 11)
The contents of the card cannot be read.
“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.
¾ Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this
does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
¾ The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents
on the card may be damaged.) This unit is compatible with SD
Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and
FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32
format. (➡ 11)
¾ The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that
are not compatible with this unit. (➡ 116)
¾ You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2
GB and SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to 32
GB.
¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
¾ Programme the Timer recording manually. (➡ 34)
The TV Guide information is not displayed
properly.
¾ There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV
Guide system provider or station provider.
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to
the interruption.
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.
Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a
long time.
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take
a few hours.
The TV Guide data is not updated.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. (➡ 94)
¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a
long time. Format the disc or card. (➡ 85)
Digital broadcast
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive
JPEG, etc., may not play back. (➡ 115)
¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,
or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong
winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV
aerial installer.
Music
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
After Auto-Tuning only some or no DVB channels
are found.
¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/
installed by a licensed installer that should comply with
Australian Standard AS1417.1.
restrictions, they will not be copied.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
Title of the newly released CD cannot be
acquired.
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a
combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this
area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception
performance.
¾ Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built-
in Gracenote® Database. Connection to the network is
necessary to acquire title for the newly released CD. (➡ 102)
¾ If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master
Antenna TV (MATV) system is designed for DVB-T reception.
Please consult your body corporate.
ID3 tag of an MP3 file is not completely
displayed.
RQT9428
¾ Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.
“No signal” message is displayed.
¾ Check “DVB Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal
Strength” are displayed in red or constantly changing, check
aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
(➡ 88)
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/
installed by a licensed installer that should comply with
Australian Standard AS1417.1.
To reset the ratings level settings
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
the BD drive, then press and hold [ REC] and [ ] (PLAY) on
*
q
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the
safety devices being activated
¾ Press and hold [ ] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The
8
settings remain.)
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Check aerial connection.
Network
I can’t connect to the network.
¾ Has the LAN cable come unplugged? Check that the LAN
cable is properly connected. (➡ 102)
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu. (➡ 88)
¾ Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone
into the LAN terminal on this unit? Connect with a straight LAN
cable. (➡ 102)
¾ Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on?
Turn the power on for each device.
¾ Is there a mistake in the network settings? Follow any
instructions you may have received from your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) and make changes to the settings.
¾ Are the broadband router settings correct? Read the operating
instructions for the broadband router.
¾ Is the broadband router and/or modem correctly connected?
Check the operating instructions for each device and connect
accordingly.
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or
all channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant
lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may
cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical
appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”
ignition system.
VIERA Link
While using my PC, I cannot connect to the
network.
¾ Does your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or service contract
prevent multiple terminals connecting at the same time? Check
the content of your contract.
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit
is set to On.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (➡ 92)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit
supports “HDAVI Control 4” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was
removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
Other
After performing an update, you can no longer
receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may
have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with
the power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
Cannot set “On” in “BD-Video 24p Output”.
¾ Only when the unit is connected to the HDMI terminal of a TV
supporting 24p you can select “On”. In some cases where the
unit is connected to a TV via an amplifier/receiver through the
HDMI terminals, you may not be able to select “On”. In this
case, connect the unit to a TV through the HDMI terminal and
connect it to the amplifier/receiver through any terminal other
than HDMI.
2
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI
Control” is working.
3
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)
is interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA
Link functions.
Pause Live TV stops.
¾ Pause Live TV from AV1 or AV2 input stops when a timer
recording in a recording mode other than DR started.
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other than the main
ones to the factory preset
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN return to
the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled. (➡ 94)
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the
settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, disc
language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN, remote control
code and network settings return to the factory presets. (➡ 94)
¾ Press and hold [ CH] and [CH ] on the main unit until the
1
2
Region Selection screen appears. All the settings except for the
ratings level, ratings PIN and clock settings return to the factory
preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
RQT9428
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system BD-RE (SL/DL): Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format
BD-R (SL/DL): Blu-ray Disc Recordable Format
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R: DVD-Video format
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD
783 nm wave length
662 nm wave length
405 nm wave length
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
DVD
BD
+R
Laser power:
+R DL (Double Layer)
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
+RW
Video
Recordable discs
BD-RE (SL/DL):
BD-R (SL/DL):
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)/MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
1-2X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2),
1-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.3),
Recording system:
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
1-2X SPEED LTH type (Ver. 1.2),
1-6X SPEED LTH type (Ver. 1.3)
AV1/AV2 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
AV1/AV2 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
DVD-R (SL):
Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
Component video output
(NTSC 480i/480p/720p/1080i, PAL 576i/576p/720p/1080i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
DVD-R (DL):
DVD-RW:
+R (SL):
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
+R (DL):
+RW:
Audio
Recording system:
Note
Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP, LP, EP mode),
Linear PCM (XP mode),
ꢁThe above rate in the list indicates the shortest time and fastest
speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to the disc by
High-Speed copying.
ꢁThe required amount of time and speed may vary depending on
the conditions such as the area where information is written or
unique feature on the disc.
Dolby Digital Max 5.1ch (DVB-T)
(DR mode, HG, HX, HE, HL mode),
MPEG 2ch (DR mode)
Audio in:
AV1/AV2 (pin jack)
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 kΩ
Maximum writing speed of discs
Audio Out (pin jack)
BD-RE (DL):
BD-RE (SL):
BD-R (DL):
BD-R (SL):
Up to 2x speed
Up to 2x speed
Up to 6x speed
Up to 6x speed
Output level:
Output impedance:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 kΩ
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Coaxial terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
HDMI terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby True HD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio)
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL:
DVD-RW:
+R:
+R DL:
+RW:
Up to 5x speed
Up to 12x speed
Up to 4x speed
Up to 4x speed
Up to 8x speed
Up to 4x speed
Up to 4x speed
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM High Bit rate Audio)
ꢁThis unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
DMR-BW850
DMR-BW750
Internal HDD capacity
: 500 GB
: 250 GB
Maximum supporting speed of drive for each discs ; Refer
“Recordable discs” (➡ above).
Note
DV input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
Type A: 1 pc
ꢁWhen recording or playing while copying, this unit may not copy at
the maximum speed.
USB port
ꢁDepending on the condition of the disc, this unit may not copy at
the maximum speed.
SD Card Slot
LAN (Ethernet) Port
1 pc
10 BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Playable discs
BD-RE (SL/DL):
BD-R (SL/DL):
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.1 conforming), JPEG
2X SPEED LTH type (Ver. 1.2 conforming),
2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1 conforming),
Television system
Tuner system
Channel coverage
4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2 conforming),
6X SPEED (Ver. 1.3 conforming)
DVB-T
Australia
VHF:
UHF:
6 to 12
27 to 69
BD-Video
RF converter output:
Not provided
DVD-RAMꢃ1: DVD Video Recording format, AVCHD format, JPEG
DVD-R: DVD-Video formatꢃ2, AVCHD formatꢃ2, MP3ꢃ2, 3, JPEGꢃ2, 3
,
Others
Region code:
DivXꢃ2, 3
DVD-Video formatꢃ2, AVCHD formatꢃ2,
MP3ꢃ2, 3, JPEGꢃ2, 3, DivXꢃ2, 3
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD
BD
#4
Region B
5 °C to 40 °C
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video formatꢃ2, DVD Video Recording format,
AVCHD formatꢃ2
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA)
CD-R/CD-RW:
DMR-BW850
DMR-BW750
Power consumption:
: Approx. 39 W
: Approx. 38 W
CD-DAꢃ2, MP3ꢃ2, 3, JPEGꢃ2, 3, DivXꢃ2, 3
Dimensions (W×H×D):
Optical pick-up
System with 2 lens, 3 integration units
(405 nm wavelength for BDs,
DMR-BW850
DMR-BW750
: 430 mm × 66 mm × 330 mm
: 430 mm × 59 mm × 330 mm
Approx. 4.1 kg
662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 783 nm wavelength for CDs)
Mass:
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 0.7 W (Power Save mode)
Approx. 10 W (Quick Start mode)
RQT9428
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SD Card
Video (SD-Video)
Slot:
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Cardꢃ4, SDHC Memory Card,
FAT12, FAT16ꢃ5 (In case of SD Memory Card)
FAT32ꢃ5 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
SD ꢃ6 USB ꢃ7
Playable
media
Compatible media:
Format:
Codec
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
File format
SD-Video format conforming
Data that can be played:
JPEG, Video (SD-Video)ꢃ6,
Video (HD-Video)
Video (HD-Video)
SD USB ꢃ8
USB device
USB standard:
Format:
Playable
media
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
Codec
MPEG4 AVC/H.264
Data that can be played:
MP3, JPEG, DivX, Video (SD-Video)ꢃ7,
File format
AVCHD format conforming
Video (HD-Video)ꢃ8
MP3
-R -R DL CD
HDD -R -R DL CD USB
Playable
media
ꢁThis unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
ꢁOperation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders and some files (tracks) may not display or
be playable.
ꢁEnglish alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
ꢁThe display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
File format
MP3
ꢁFiles must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Compression 32 kbps to 320 kbps
rates
Sampling rate 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable (except
for HDD) : 300 folders (including the root folder)
ꢁDepending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders may not play in the order you numbered them.
ꢁThis unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
ꢁDepending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
Number of
files
Maximum number of files recognizable (except for
HDD) : 3000 files
Note
ID3 tags
compatible
ꢁSpecifications are subject to change without notice.
ꢁUseable capacity will be less. (SD card)
JPEG
HDD BD-RE RAM -R -R DL CD SD USB
Playable
media
ꢃ1 Remove the disc from cartridge case (TYPE1 cannot be used).
ꢃ2 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
ꢃ3 ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet
This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-
R DL).
File format
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera
File system)ꢃ9
ꢁFiles must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Number of
pixels
Between 34 × 34 and 8192 × 8192 pixels
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
ꢃ4 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
Thawing Time Approx. 2 sec. in case of SD Card (8.1 M pixels,
JPEG)
ꢃ5 Long file name is unsupported.
CD
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99
ꢃ6 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from SD
card to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
folders (including the root folder)
HDD BD-RE RAM -R -R DL SD USB
Maximum
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
ꢃ7 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
device to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
ꢃ8 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB
device to HDD, BD-RE or BD-R disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD, BD-RE or
BD-R disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.
ꢃ9 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
(including the root folder)
CD
Number of
files
Maximum number of files recognizable: 999
files
RAM -R -R DL SD USB
Maximum number of
files recognizable: 3000 files
HDD BD-RE
Maximum number of files
recognizable: 9999 files
MOTION
JPEG
Progressive
JPEG
not supported
ꢁIt may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
ꢁWhen there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
DivX
-R -R DL CD USB
Playable
media
File format
DivX
ꢁFiles must have the
extension “.DIVX” or
“.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number of
folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable:
300 folders (including the root folder)
Number of
files
Maximum number of files recognizable: 200
files
Support
version
Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including
DivX®6) with standard playback of DivX®
media files. Certified to the DivX Home
Theater Profile. GMC (Global Motion
Compensation) is not supported. DivX, DivX
Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
RQT9428
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
SD
■ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in
the order you numbered the folders.
ꢄꢄꢄ: Numbers XXX: Letters
Card
DCIM
Structure of MP3 folders
CD USB
XXXXX
(Picture folder)
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in
the order you want to play
them.
XXXX
.JPG
Root
001 Folder
Any folder with JPEG files
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
e.g.,
001
002 Folder
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 Folder
P0000001.JPG
P0000001.JPG
(MPEG2 folder)
SD_VIDEO
PRG
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Order of play
MOV
MOV
PRG
.MOD
.MOI
.PGI
Structures of still picture folders
CD USB
MGR_INFO
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order they
were updated or taken.
Root
(MPEG2 information folder)
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
PRIVATE
#8%*&ꢀ
002 Folder
(AVCHD folder)
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
004 Folder
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Order of play
BD-RE RAM
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
ꢄꢄꢄ: Numbers XXX: Letters
ꢃ1 Still pictures on the root
folder can also be
Root
1
XXXX
JPEG
.JPG
displayed.
ꢃ2 Folders can be created on
other equipment. However,
these folders cannot be
selected as a copying
destination.
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX
.JPG
ꢁIf a folder name or file name
has been input using other
equipment, the name may
not be displayed properly or
you may not be able to play
or edit the data.
2
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX
.JPG
RQT9428
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,567;
7,333,929; 7,212,872; & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
ꢁSDHC logo is a trademark.
ꢁPortions of this product are protected under copyright law and are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer
to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded
by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No
license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
“Blu-ray Disc” is trademark.
VIERA CASTTM is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
“BD-LIVE” logo is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association.
“BONUSVIEW” is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association.
Plays DivX® video
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc. and is used under license.
YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.
Gracenote® Corporate Description
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide.You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights
under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009
Gracenote.This product and service may practice one or more of
the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and
other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
Gracenote® End-User License Agreement
USE OFTHIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OFTHETERMS BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or
file identification and obtain music-related information, including name,
artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to
perform other functions.You may use Gracenote Data only by means
of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE
DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal
non-commercial use only.You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third
party.YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
RQT9428
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
AVCHD
Film and video
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition video cameras
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
that can be used to record and play high-resolution HD images.
BD-J
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)Generally
appropriate for motion picture films.
Some BD-Video discs contain Java applications, and these
applications are called BD-J.You can enjoy various interactive
features in addition to playing normal video.
Bitstream
Video:
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs)
or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1
channel) before it is decoded into its various channels.
BONUSVIEW™
Finalise
With the new play function of the BD-Video, you can enjoy the
secondary video recorded on the disc, in addition to the main movie.
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the
place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2, etc. are stored.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Formatting
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV.
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format BD-RE, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused BD-R, +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with
smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be
reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep
Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the
connected TV.]
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
DivX
=
+
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
Frame
Field
Field
ꢁA frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
ꢁA field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
DNS Server
A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates
Internet domain names into IP addresses.
Dolby Digital
Gateway
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio.
IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access.
Usually called a router IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.1)
HDD (Hard disk drive)
Dolby Digital Plus
Multi-channel audio and higher audio quality is made possible using
Dolby Digital Plus. BD-Video supports up to 7.1 channel output.
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the
reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a very high quality audio format that reproduces
the studio master audio. BD-Video supports up to 7.1 channel
output.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into fewer channels.
Hub
Drive
Used for connecting more than one device to the network.
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc (BD)
and SD card (SD).These perform the reading and writing of data.
IP address
A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when,
for example, connected to the Internet. When using a PC in a LAN
to access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN, the IP
address is called the local IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.10)
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
DTS-HD
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures. If you
select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the data will
be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size.The benefit of JPEG is
less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of compression.
DTS-HD is a high-quality, sophisticated audio format used in movie
theaters. Previous DTS Digital Surround-compatible equipment can
play DTS-HD as DTS Digital Surround audio. BD-Video supports up
to 7.1 channel output.
LAN (Local Area Network)
Dynamic range
A group of linked devices in a company, school or home.Indicates
the boundaries of a particular network.
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Local storage
This storage area is used as a destination for sub contents for
playing virtual packages on BD-Video.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite
based digital broadcasting.
RQT9428
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPEG-4AVC/H.264
24p
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG-4AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for recording of
the high definition videos.
This is a progressive image recorded at a rate of 24 frames per second.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately
one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, BD-Video and DVD-Video are produced with the
intention that they be viewed on a widescreen television (16:9
aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio)
televisions. Two styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal
with this problem.
Pan & Scan:The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Progressive/Interlace
Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2
phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans. Progressive
will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it will give high
definition image without flickering compared with interlace.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
Router
Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device, such as the
PC, and relays the flow of data within the network.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses
them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for
transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The
channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions,
seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is
connected to the aerial, etc.
Subnet mask
Enables efficient network use. A set of numbers which identify which
part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the
router is the network portion.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
VIERA CAST
An information service unique to Panasonic where specific Web
sites can be viewed on this unit by connecting to the Internet
without using a PC.
x.v.ColourTM
x.v.ColourTM is a name for devices that are compatible with the
xvYCC format, an international standard for expanded colour in
motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.
You can enjoy vivid colours of wider colour ranges for a more
realistic picture when connected to a TV that supports the
x.v.ColourTM with HDMI cable.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines
pass every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image.
Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television
broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a
more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
RQT9428
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precaution
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIRYOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
ꢁDO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
ꢁUSE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
ꢁDO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK);THERE ARE NO
USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION!
ꢁDO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED.TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
ꢁDO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS,TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
ꢁDO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
(Inside of product)
ꢁDISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such
rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or
intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with
applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations
involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.
Placement
Foreign matter
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock
or malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from
the power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the
unit and cause a fire.
Service
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
RQT9428
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panasonic Warranty
1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty
Panasonic or it's Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts
or labour if, in the opinion of Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.
2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its
Authorised Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it's
territories. Warranty cover only applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only
if valid proof of purchase is presented when warranty service is requested.
3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations (as noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of
Panasonic). The warranty covers normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure
resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust,
abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects
or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including unauthorised alterations), exposure to
abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered the product.
4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:
(a) Video or Audio Tapes
(e) Cabinet Part
(b) DVD Video, Blu Ray, or Recordable Discs
(c) SD cards or USB devices
(f) Information stored on the Hard Disk Drive
(g) User replaceable Batteries
(d) Video or audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use
5. Some products may be supplied with ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and
will not cover
(a) Internet connection related problems
(b) Access fees or charges incurred for the internet
(c) the use of incompatible software or software not specifically stipulated in the product operations manual; and
(d) any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection
to the internet or any other device.
6. If warranty service is required you should:
•
Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre
Locator for the name/address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.
Send or bring the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase
receipt as a proof of purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest
Authorised Service Centre must be arranged by you.
•
7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-
installation or re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of
any screen, (and any other ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the
product or any part thereof or replacement of and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by
reason of, during, associated with, or related to such installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.
Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia,
however, coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your
product, please telephone our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre
Locator.
Unless otherwise specified to the consumer the benefits conferred by this express warranty are additional to all other
conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies expressed or implied by the Trade Practices Act 1974 and
similar consumer protection provisions contained in legislation of the States and Territories and all other obligations
and liabilities on the part of the manufacturer or supplier and nothing contained herein shall restrict or modify such
rights, remedies, obligations or liabilities.
May 2008
THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)
SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES
If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries,
please contact our Customer Care Centre via the Panasonic website www.panasonic.com.au or
by phone on 132 600. If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.
Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited
ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187
Locked Bag 505, Frenchs Forest, NSW 2086
PRO-031-F11 Issue: 1.0
29-05-2008
RQT9428
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Album (Music)
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Album (Still picture)
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Audio
Direct Navigator
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Discs
Disc name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Discs that cannot be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Play-only discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Display
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
AVCHD
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Digital channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Divide Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43, 115, 118
DR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DVB Signal Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
BD-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
BONUSVIEWTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Edit
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Channel
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . 86
Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Chasing playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Connection
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 118
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 118
FR (Flexible Recording Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
FUNCTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 101
Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Digital output terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 100
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
S VIDEO terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 99–101
Video cassette recorder (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
VIDEO terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Copy
HDD
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Handling care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Connecting with a Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Settings (HDMI Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
HD Video
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 50–56
Copy Title Playing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
CPRM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118
Language
Code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 89
Soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 89
Subtitle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 89
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 118
Deep Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
All titles (Discs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
All titles (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Digital Audio Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DVB Signal Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Multiple Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
New Channel Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Subtitle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Manual Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Mode
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
MPEG2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Music
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Play (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Play (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Play (Music on HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
RQT9428
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Still picture
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Subtitle
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc (Disc menu) . . . . . . . . 80
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Entering text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Network
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
New Channel Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
One Touch Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Partial Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing back
BD-Video/DVD-Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Playlist
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Progressive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 119
Properties
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Protection
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using the TV Guide System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Title
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 50–56
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Title Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 37
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
USB
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Play (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Quick View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VIERA CASTTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control)
Ratings level
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 100
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
BD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Auto Renewal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Recording via AV2 input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 34–37
Recording to discs from external equipment
x.v.ColourTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Recording via AV2 input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SD card
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Play (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Play (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SD Video
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
RQT9428
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-If you see this symbol-
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to
a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any
subsequent damage caused by such loss. Examples of
causes of such losses are
ꢁA disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a Blu-ray
Disc Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
ꢁA disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
ꢁA disc recorded and edited with a Blu-ray Disc Recorder or
computer disc drive manufactured by another company is
played in this unit.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
En
RQT9428-1L
H0309FJ1049
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|